NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
(Revision S, July 21, 2015)
Specification Number: 582126000
Model Number: 701NVBB
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
This page is intentionally blank.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Table of Contents
Admonishments Used in this Document ................................................................................................................ v
Important Safety Instructions .............................................................................................................................. vi
General Safety ........................................................................................................................................................vi
Voltages .................................................................................................................................................................vi
Battery ...................................................................................................................................................................vi
Hazardous Voltage ................................................................................................................................................ vii
Handling Equipment Containing Static Sensitive Components ................................................................................ vii
Static Warning ....................................................................................................................................................viii
FCC Information ................................................................................................................................................... ix
General Information .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Installation Acceptance Checklist .......................................................................................................................... 1
Installing System Components .............................................................................................................................. 2
General Requirements ............................................................................................................................................ 2
Mounting the Relay Racks ....................................................................................................................................... 2
Mounting ........................................................................................................................................................ 2
Ventilation Requirements ................................................................................................................................ 2
Mounting System Components in an Equipment Rack ............................................................................................. 4
Mounting the Distribution Cabinet................................................................................................................... 4
Mounting the LMS1000 (List 80) ...................................................................................................................... 7
Mounting the Rectifier Module Shelves ............................................................................................................ 9
Mounting List 63 and 64 DC-DC Converter Shelves ......................................................................................... 15
Installing Optional Battery Busbar Extension Kits, Part Nos. 514713 and 529143 .................................................... 18
Installing Part No. 514713 Busbar Kit ............................................................................................................. 18
Installing Part No. 529143 Busbar Kit ............................................................................................................. 20
Installing Optional Lug Adapter Busbar Kits, Part Nos. 514714 and 534449 ............................................................ 22
Installing the Lug Adapter Busbars ................................................................................................................. 22
Installing the Optional System Load Shunt Test point Kit, P/N 545569 (if furnished) ............................................... 24
Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................ 24
Installing Kit .................................................................................................................................................. 24
Installing the List 72, List 74, List 75, List 76, List 77, List 78, or RS-485 (P/O List 80) MCA Interface Option
(if furnished) ......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Mounting a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe (if furnished) .............................................. 28
Mounting a TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) and Probes (if furnished) .................................................. 28
Installing Bullet Nose Type Fuseholders and TPS/TLS Fuses (if furnished) ................................................................ 29
Installing Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breakers (if furnished) ....................................................................................... 30
Installing GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly (P/N 509128) On A Bullet Nose Type Distribution Assembly (if
furnished) ............................................................................................................................................................. 31
Installing TPH Fuses (if furnished) .......................................................................................................................... 33
Setting Wiring Options ....................................................................................................................................... 34
Admonishments ................................................................................................................................................... 34
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[i]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
General Safety ............................................................................................................................................... 34
Voltages ........................................................................................................................................................ 34
Circuit Card Handling ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Wiring Options on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 Located in Distribution Cabinet(s)................. 35
Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 .......................................................................... 35
Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External System Voltage Meter Reading Circuit Card
P/N 500476 Orientation ................................................................................................................................. 35
Fuses and Fuse Alarm Polarity Circuit Card P/N 500477 Orientation ................................................................. 36
LVD (J5) Jumper ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Shunt POD (J6) Jumper ................................................................................................................................... 37
Final Procedure .............................................................................................................................................. 37
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 though S4 Settings ........................................ 39
Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm Circuit Card P/N 524734 Jumpers J10 and J11 Settings (List 71 Only)................. 42
MCA Local and Remote Access Lockout Switch S1 Settings on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card (Main
Bay Only) .............................................................................................................................................................. 44
MCA Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main Bay Only) ....................................... 46
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main Bay Only) ........................... 48
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "RS-232 Port Hardware Handshake" Jumper (Main Bay Only) ........................ 49
List RD and RE Shunt Monitoring (Shunt POD) Circuit Card Switch Settings ............................................................. 51
Shunt Capacity Selection Switches ................................................................................................................. 51
Shunt POD Identification Switch ..................................................................................................................... 51
Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card P/N 535250 Switches S1 and S2 Settings ........................................................ 54
Making Electrical Connections ............................................................................................................................. 56
Admonishments ................................................................................................................................................... 56
Wiring Considerations ........................................................................................................................................... 56
Relay Rack Grounding Connection (Frame Ground) ................................................................................................ 56
External Connections to List 80 LMS1000 Monitoring System (If Furnished) ............................................................ 56
AC Input and AC Input Equipment Grounding Connections .................................................................................... 57
Connections to 588705000 List 11 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves..................................... 57
Connections to 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves (when
582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT provided) .................................................................... 58
Connections to 582126000 List 45 (Single-Phase) Top Mount AC Input Termination Panel .............................. 60
Connections to 588705000 List 3 (Three-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves (when
582126000 List 46 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT provided) .................................................................... 63
Connections to 582126000 List 46 (Three-Phase) Top Mount AC Input Termination Panel ............................... 65
External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connections.............................................................................................. 67
Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe or TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator
Module) Connection (if required) ................................................................................................................... 69
Connections to Terminal Block TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 ............................... 69
Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 (if List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm
Termination Circuit Card is NOT Provided) ...................................................................................................... 72
Connections to Terminal Blocks J1-J4 on Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card P/N
524734 (List 71 only) ..................................................................................................................................... 81
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[ii]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Battery Disconnect External Alarm Connections to List RB, RC, RD, or RE (if furnished) .................................... 89
Load Shunt Connections (Shunted GJ/218 Circuit Breakers and/or List AJ and CJ Distribution Bus
Panels) (if furnished) ...................................................................................................................................... 90
Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Connections .......................................................................................................... 95
Factory Connected Interbay Cables ................................................................................................................ 96
Customer Connected Bay-to-Bay Cables ...................................................................................................... 100
Connections to List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves ................................................................................................. 104
Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves Alarm Cable Harness ............................................................... 104
Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelf Output Cables ............................................................................ 104
Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbars (List 2 Only)............................................................................................................ 107
Cable Connection(s) to the MCA Interface Option ............................................................................................... 109
RS-485 MCA Interface Option Connection (List 80 Only) ............................................................................... 109
Modem MCA Interface Option Connection (Lists 72 and 74 Only) ................................................................. 109
RS-232 MCA Interface Option Connection (List 74 Only) ............................................................................... 111
Ethernet MCA Interface Option Connection (Lists 75-78 Only) ...................................................................... 112
Load Connections to Distribution Cabinet(s) ....................................................................................................... 113
Distribution Assemblies Wiring Illustrations ................................................................................................. 114
Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped with Bullet Nose Type Distribution Devices
(TPS/TLS Fuses and/or Bullet Nose-Type Circuit Breakers) ............................................................................. 114
Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped with TPH-Type Distribution Fuse Mounting
Blocks and/or GJ/218-Type Distribution Circuit Breaker Mounting Blocks ...................................................... 115
Connecting Loads to a P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly ......................................... 115
Connecting Loads to Bulk Feed Distribution Assemblies ............................................................................... 115
Battery Connections to Power System ................................................................................................................. 133
If NO Internal Battery Disconnect Device is Provided..................................................................................... 133
If Internal Battery Disconnect Fuses or Circuit Breakers are Provided ............................................................. 134
If an Internal Battery Disconnect Contactor is Provided (List RA, RB, RC, RD, RE) ............................................ 134
If a Lorain Battery Stand Under Power System is Provided (List 92) ................................................................ 134
Installing Rear Busbar Shield onto the LMS1000 (List 80)...................................................................................... 140
Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers (List 2 Only) .................................................................................................. 141
Installing and Connecting Batteries in List 93 (If Provided) ................................................................................... 142
Admonishments .......................................................................................................................................... 142
Battery Manufacturer Information ............................................................................................................... 142
Installing and Connecting Batteries .............................................................................................................. 143
Installing Optional Front Battery Cover (23” Trays Only) ............................................................................... 145
Installing Optional Circuit Breaker Guard ...................................................................................................... 146
Installing External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134............................................................................................ 147
Kit Contents ................................................................................................................................................ 147
Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 147
Installing Modules............................................................................................................................................. 150
Installing the Rectifier Modules ........................................................................................................................... 150
Installing the Converter Modules in List 63 and 64 (if furnished) ........................................................................... 151
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[iii]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Initially Starting the System .............................................................................................................................. 152
Initially Starting, Configuring, and Checking System Operation ............................................................................ 152
Admonishment ............................................................................................................................................ 152
Controls and Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 152
Pre-Charging Load Capacitors ...................................................................................................................... 154
Initial Startup Preparation ............................................................................................................................ 154
Initially Starting the System .......................................................................................................................... 154
MCA Initialization ......................................................................................................................................... 155
Initially Connecting Low Voltage Disconnect Circuits (if furnished) ................................................................ 161
Configuring the System................................................................................................................................ 161
Setting Up the MCA Ethernet Option TCP/IP (and SNMP if required) Parameters (Lists 75, 76, 77,
and 78 Only) ................................................................................................................................................ 163
Checking Meter Operation ........................................................................................................................... 170
Checking Adjustment and Calibration Values ................................................................................................ 171
Checking MCA Audible Alarm and Audible Alarm Cutoff (if available) ............................................................ 171
Checking Manual Test/Equalize and Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize .................................................. 171
Checking Remote Test/Equalize ................................................................................................................... 173
Checking Remote High Voltage Shutdown ................................................................................................... 174
Checking Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect .......................................................................... 174
Checking Remote On/Off (TR) (if RS-485 Interface is installed) ...................................................................... 175
Checking AC Fail Alarm and Rectifier Module Fail Alarm ................................................................................ 175
Checking Fuse Alarm/Circuit Breaker Alarm .................................................................................................. 175
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 1 ........................................................................................................ 177
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 2 ........................................................................................................ 178
Checking System Battery On Discharge Alarm .............................................................................................. 179
Checking System 50% Battery On Discharge (Very Low Voltage) Alarm ......................................................... 180
Checking System Current Alarm ................................................................................................................... 181
Checking Subsystem (if connected) High Voltage Alarm ............................................................................... 182
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Low Voltage Alarm ................................................................................ 183
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Current Alarm ....................................................................................... 184
Checking Low Voltage Disconnect (if furnished) ........................................................................................... 185
Checking System Status ............................................................................................................................... 190
Final Step ..................................................................................................................................................... 190
NetPerform™ Optimization Services ................................................................................................................. 191
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[iv]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Admonishments Used in this Document
DANGER! Warns of a hazard the reader will be exposed to that will likely result in death or serious injury
if not avoided. (ANSI, OSHA)
Danger
Warning
Caution
WARNING! Warns of a potential hazard the reader may be exposed to that could result in death or
serious injury if not avoided. This admonition is not used for situations that pose a risk only to
equipment, software, data, or service. (ANSI)
CAUTION! Warns of a potential hazard the reader may be exposed to that could result in minor or
moderate injury if not avoided. (ANSI, OSHA) This admonition is not used for situations that pose a risk
only to equipment, data, or service, even if such use appears to be permitted in some of the applicable
standards. (OSHA)
ALERT! Alerts the reader to an action that must be avoided in order to protect equipment, software,
data, or service. (ISO)
Alert
ALERT! Alerts the reader to an action that must be performed in order to prevent equipment damage,
software corruption, data loss, or service interruption. (ISO)
Alert
FIRE SAFETY! Informs the reader of fire safety information, reminders, precautions, or policies, or of the
locations of fire-fighting and fire-safety equipment. (ISO)
Fire Safety
SAFETY! Informs the reader of general safety information, reminders, precautions, or policies not related
to a particular source of hazard or to fire safety. (ISO, ANSI, OSHA)
Safety
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[v]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Important Safety Instructions
General Safety
Danger
DC Output and Battery Voltages
DANGER!
YOU MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY PROCEDURES.
Danger
Performing the following procedures may expose you to
hazards. These procedures should be performed by
qualified technicians familiar with the hazards
associated with this type of equipment. These hazards
may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid
these hazards:
a) The tasks should be performed in the order
indicated.
b) Remove watches, rings, and other metal objects.
c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or
termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no
voltage or the expected voltage is present. Check
for voltage with both AC and DC voltmeters prior to
making contact.
d) Wear eye protection.
e) Use certified and well maintained insulated tools.
Use double insulated tools appropriately rated for
the work to be performed.
Danger
DANGER! This system produces DC Power and may have
a battery source connected to it. Although the DC
voltage is not hazardously high, the rectifiers and/or
battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise
extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have
any tool inadvertently contact an output terminal or
battery terminal or exposed wire connected to an
output terminal or battery terminal. NEVER allow a
metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one
termination or battery terminal at a time, or to
simultaneously contact a termination or battery
terminal and a grounded object. Even a momentary
short circuit can cause sparking, explosion, and injury.
DANGER! Follow local lockout/tagout procedures to
ensure DC branch circuit protection devices remain deenergized during installation at loads, as required.
Battery
Warning
WARNING! Correct polarity must be observed when
connecting battery leads.
Voltages
AC Input Voltages
Warning
Danger
DANGER! This system operates from AC input voltage
capable of producing fatal electrical shock. AC input
power must be completely disconnected from the
branch circuits wiring used to provide power to the
system before any AC electrical connections are made.
Follow local lockout/tagout procedures to ensure
upstream branch circuit breakers remain de-energized
during installation. DO NOT apply AC input power to
the system until all electrical connections have been
completed and checked.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[vi]
WARNING! Special safety precautions are required for
procedures involving handling, installing, and servicing
batteries. Observe all battery safety precautions in this
manual and in the battery instruction manual. These
precautions should be followed implicitly at all times.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Warning
WARNING! A battery can present a risk of electrical
shock and high short circuit current. Servicing of
batteries should be performed or supervised only by
properly trained and qualified personnel knowledgeable
about batteries and the required precautions.
Danger
The following precautions should be observed when
working on batteries:
•
Remove watches, rings, and other metal objects.
•
Eye protection should be worn to prevent injury
from accidental electrical arcs.
•
Use certified and well maintained insulated tools.
Use double insulated tools appropriately rated for
the work to be performed. Ensure that wrenches
with more than one working end have only one end
exposed.
•
Do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries.
•
Disconnect charging source prior to connecting or
disconnecting battery terminals.
•
•
•
In addition to the hazard of electric shock, gas produced
by batteries can be explosive and sulfuric acid can cause
severe burns. Do not open or mutilate batteries.
Released electrolyte is harmful to the skin and eyes, and
is toxic. If electrolyte comes into contact with skin, the
affected area should be washed immediately with large
amounts of water.
[vii]
•
Batteries generate explosive gases during normal
operation. Systems containing batteries should
never be installed in an airtight room or space.
Only install in a ventilated environment.
•
Batteries are an energy source that can produce
high amounts of electrical current.
•
Wear complete protection for eyes, face, hands,
and clothing. Examples are safety goggles or face
shield, a rubber apron and gloves.
•
If battery acid enters your eye, immediately flush
your eye with running cold water for at least 15
minutes. Get medical attention immediately.
•
If battery acid contacts skin or clothing, wash
immediately with soap and water.
ALERT! Performing maintenance and/or
troubleshooting procedures may interrupt power to the
loads, if battery reserve is not sufficient.
Hazardous Voltage
Danger
DANGER! Hazard of electrical shock. More than one
disconnect may be required to de-energize the system
before servicing.
Handling Equipment Containing
Static Sensitive Components
Alert
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Batteries contain sulfuric acid.
WHEN WORKING WITH LEAD-ACID BATTERIES:
Alert
ALWAYS FOLLOW THE BATTERY MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
•
FOR THESE REASONS, IT IS OF CRITICAL IMPORTANCE
THAT YOU READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND FOLLOW
THEM EXACTLY.
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced with an
incorrect type or if polarity is reversed. When
replacing batteries, replace with the same
manufacturer and type, or equivalent.
Dispose of used batteries according to the
instructions provided with the batteries. Do not
dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode.
DANGER! This equipment may be used in conjunction
with lead-acid batteries. Working near lead-acid
batteries is dangerous!
ALERT! Installation or removal of equipment containing
static sensitive components requires careful handling.
Before handling any equipment containing static
sensitive components, read and follow the instructions
contained on the Static Warning Page.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Static Warning
This equipment contains static sensitive components. The warnings listed below must be observed to prevent damage to these
components. Disregarding any of these warnings may result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.
1.
Strictly adhere to the procedures provided in this document.
2.
Before touching any equipment containing static sensitive components, discharge all static electricity from yourself by wearing a
wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor. Some wrist straps, such as Emerson Network Power Part Number
631810600, have a built-in one megohm resistor; no external resistor is necessary. Read and follow wrist strap manufacturer’s
instructions outlining use of a specific wrist strap.
3.
Do not touch traces or components on equipment containing static sensitive components.
Handle equipment containing static sensitive components only by the edges that do not have connector pads.
4.
After removing equipment containing static sensitive components, place the equipment only on conductive or anti-static material
such as conductive foam, conductive plastic, or aluminum foil. Do not use ordinary Styrofoam™ or ordinary plastic.
5.
Store and ship equipment containing static sensitive components only in static shielding containers.
6.
If necessary to repair equipment containing static sensitive components, wear an appropriately grounded wrist strap, work on a
conductive surface, use a grounded soldering iron, and use grounded test equipment.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[viii]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
FCC Information
The MCA Interface Modem Option (if installed) has been granted a registration number by the Federal Communications Commission,
under Part 68 rules and regulations for direct connection to the telephone lines. In order to comply with these FCC rules, the following
instructions must be carefully read and applicable portions followed completely:
1.
Direct connection to the telephone lines may be made only through the standard plug- ended cord furnished to the utility-installed
jack. No connection may be made to party or coin phone lines. Prior to connecting the device to the telephone lines, you must:
2.
Call your telephone company and inform them you have an FCC registered device you desire to connect to their telephone lines.
Give them the number(s) of the line(s) to be used, the make and model of the device, the FCC registration number and ringer
equivalence. This information will be found on the device or enclosed with instructions as well as the jack suitable for your device.
3.
After the telephone company has been advised of the above you may connect your device if the jack is available, or after the
telephone company has made the installation.
4.
Repairs may be made only by the manufacturer or his authorized service agency. Unauthorized repairs void registration and
warranty. Contact seller or manufacturer for details of permissible user performed routine repairs, and where and how to have other
than routine repairs.
5.
If, through abnormal circumstances, harm to the telephone lines is caused, it should be unplugged until it can be determined if your
device or the telephone line is the source. If your device is the source, it should not be reconnected until necessary repairs are
effected.
6.
Should the telephone company notify you that your device is causing harm, the device should be unplugged. The telephone
company will, where practicable, notify you, that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. However, where prior
notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service, if such action is reasonably necessary, in such
cases the telephone company must (A) Promptly notify you of such temporary discontinuance, (B) Afford you the opportunity to
correct the condition and (C) Inform you of your rights to bring a complaint to the FCC under their rules.
7.
The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such
action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with FCC rules. If such changes can be
reasonably expected to render any customer’s devices incompatible with telephone company facilities, or require modification or
alteration, or otherwise materially affect its performance, written notification must be given to the user, to allow uninterrupted
service.
The following information is provided here and on a label attached to the outside of the MCA Interface Modem Option (if installed).
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
JACK
RINGER EQUIVALENCE
FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER
RJ-11
0.2A
B46USA-22429-MM-E
[ix]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
This page is intentionally blank.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[x]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
General Information
This document (Section 5974) provides Installation Instructions for
NetSure™ Power System Model 701NVBB, Spec. No. 582126000.
For User Instructions, refer to Section 5975 provided on the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to SAG582126000 (System Application Guide) for additional
information. This document, along with the complete document
set, can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation
Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to PD588705000 (Power Data Sheet) for Rectifier Module
Mounting Shelf information. This document can be accessed from
the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your
system.
Refer to UM1R483500e (Rectifier Module User Instructions) for
Rectifier Module (PCU) information. This document can be
accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package)
furnished with your system.
Your power system may contain an optional LMS1000 Monitoring
System, refer to Section 5879 (LMS1000 Installation Instructions)
and Section 5847 (LMS1000 User Instructions) provided on the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with the LMS1000.
Installation Acceptance Checklist
Provided below is an Installation Acceptance Checklist. This
checklist helps ensure proper installation and initial operation of
the system. As the procedures presented in this document are
completed, check the appropriate box on this list. If the procedure
is not required to be performed for your installation site, also
check the box in this list to indicate that the procedure was read.
When installation is done, ensure that each block in this list has
been checked. Some of these procedures may have been factory
performed for you.
The system is not powered up until the end of this
checklist.
Note:
Some of these procedures may have been performed at
the factory for you.
Relay Racks Mounted to the Floor

All Equipment Mounted in Relay Rack(s)

Optional Battery Busbar Extension Kits Installed
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB

MCA Interface Option Installed (if required)

Optional System Load Shunt Test Point Kit Installed (if
required)

Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe
Mounted (if required)

TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) and Probes
Mounted (if required)

Bullet Nose Type Fuseholders and TPS/TLS Fuses Installed
(if required)

Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breakers Installed (if required)

GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly Installed (if required)

TPH Fuses Installed (if required)

Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External
System Voltage Meter Reading Circuit Card Oriented to
Proper Position

Fuses and Fuse Alarm Polarity Circuit Card Oriented to
Proper Position

LVD and Shunt POD Jumpers Set

Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card Identification
Switches Set

Audible Alarm Local/Remote Jumpers Set (List 71 only)

MCA Local and Remote Access Lockout Switches Set

Modem or RS-232/Modem Option (if furnished) "Number
of Rings before Answer" Jumper Set

RS-232/Modem Option (if furnished) "RS-232 Hardware
Handshake" Jumper Set

List RD and RE Shunt POD Switches Set

Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card Switches Set
Making Electrical Connections
Installing System Components

Optional Lug Adapter Busbar Kits Installed
Setting Wiring Options
For a color MCA Menu Tree, refer to Section 6022. Section 6022 is
provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD
CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD).
Note:

[1]

Relay Rack Grounding Connection (Frame Ground) Made

External Connections to LMS1000 (List 80) Made (as
required)

AC Input and AC Input Equipment Grounding
Connections Made

External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connections
Made
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974

Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Connections Made (as
required)

List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves (if furnished)
Connections Made
•
Clearance requirements are:
a.
Recommended minimum aisle space clearance for
the front of the relay rack is 2' 6".
b.
Recommended minimum aisle space clearance for
the rear of the relay rack is 2’ 0” for any of the
following conditions:

Bay-to-Bay Busbars Installed (List 2 only)

MCA Interface Option Cable Connection(s) Made (as
required)
o
Multiple bay arrangements that incorporate
rear inter-bay busbars (List 2 bays).

Load Connections Made
o

Battery Connections Made
Making AC input connections to Rectifier
Mounting Shelves when a Top Mount AC Input
Termination Panel is not ordered.

Rear Cover Installed on LMS1000 (List 80) (if required)

Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers Installed (List 2 only)
o
Addition of a Rectifier Mounting Shelf in the
field.

Batteries Installed and Connected in a List 93 Battery
Shelf (if furnished)
o
Addition of any DC-DC Converter Mounting
Shelf (List 63 or 64) in the field.

External Shunt Monitoring Kit Installed (if furnished)
For all other conditions, recommended minimum aisle
space clearance for the rear of the relay rack is that which
is specified for proper Rectifier Mounting Shelf
ventilation. Refer to the specific Rectifier Mounting Shelf
Power Data Sheet for ventilation spacing requirements.
Installing Modules

Rectifier Modules (PCUs) Installed

Converter Modules (if furnished) Installed
Initially Starting the System

Note:
System Started, Configured, and Checked
Minimum spacing specified for ventilation may not
permit replacement of certain components such as
busbars or Rectifier Mounting Shelves.
Installing System Components
Mounting the Relay Racks
General Requirements
Note:
•
This product is intended only for installation in a
Restricted Access Location on or above a noncombustible surface.
•
This product is intended for installation in Network
Telecommunication Facilities (CO, vault, hut, or other
environmentally controlled electronic equipment
enclosure).
•
•
This product is intended for connection to the common
bonding network in a Network Telecommunication
Facility (CO, vault, hut, or other environmentally
controlled electronic equipment enclosure).
The installer should be familiar with the installation
requirements and techniques to be used in mounting the
relay racks to the floor.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Refer to the General Requirements section at the
beginning of this section.
MOUNTING
All equipment cabinets are factory mounted to the relay rack(s)
specified when ordered.
The system consists of one or two relay racks. For busbarconnected systems (List 1 with List 2), locate relay racks in a line
adjacent to each other, with no space between them.
Refer to Figure 1 for relay rack floor mounting dimensions.
VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
Follow the requirements stated in the “Ventilation Requirements”
section of PD588705000 (Power Data Sheet). The Power Data
Sheet can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation
Package) furnished with your system.
[2]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 1. Relay Rack Floor Mounting Dimensions
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[3]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Mounting System Components in an Equipment Rack
Note:
If the power system was ordered in a relay rack, all procedures in this section have been performed at the factory.
This power system is designed to mount in a standard 23” relay rack having 1-3/4” multiple drillings. Refer to System Application Guide
SAG582126000 for overall dimensions and a list of available relay racks. The SAG can be accessed from the CD (Electronic
Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
MOUNTING THE DISTRIBUTION CABINET
The Distribution Cabinet must be the top-most component in the rack. Perform the following steps to mount the Distribution Cabinet.
Danger:
The relay rack must be securely anchored to the floor before the Distribution Cabinet is installed.
The Distribution Cabinet is heavy. Use a hoist, battery lift, or other appropriate lifting device to raise and support the cabinet during
the installation. Take appropriate precautions to avoid injury. Use caution not to damage busbars that extend from the bottom of
the cabinet. Do not attempt to support the cabinet on these busbars.
Procedure
1.
Note:
Remove the Distribution Cabinet from its shipping brackets. Position the cabinet in the equipment rack.
Install the ground washers so the teeth dig into the paint on the mounting angles. Torque all screws to 65 in-lbs.
2.
1-Row Cabinet: Install (8) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N 218710500) and (8) No. 12 ground washers (P/N
215640600). Refer to Figure 2A.
3.
2-Row Cabinet: Install (8) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N 218710500) and (8) No. 12 ground washers (P/N
215640600). Refer to Figure 2A.
4.
3-Row Cabinet: Install (14) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N 218710500) and (14) No. 12 ground washers
(P/N 215640600). Refer to Figure 2B.
5.
4-Row Cabinet: Install (16) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N 218710500) and (16) No. 12 ground washers
(P/N 215640600). Refer to Figure 2B.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[4]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 2A. Mounting the 1- and 2-Row Distribution Cabinets
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
1-ROW CABINET
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
2-ROW CABINET
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[5]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 2B. Mounting the 3- and 4-Row Distribution Cabinets
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(7 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(7 PLACES PER SIDE)
3-ROW CABINET
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(8 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(8 PLACES PER SIDE)
4-ROW CABINET
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[6]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MOUNTING THE LMS1000 (LIST 80)
If provided, mount the LMS1000 directly beneath the Distribution Cabinet, as follows.
Procedure
1.
Note:
2.
Mount the LMS1000 to the relay rack directly beneath the Distribution Cabinet. See Figure 3A.
Install the ground washers so the teeth dig into the paint on the mounting angles. Torque all relay rack mounting screws to 65
in-lbs.
Mount two (2) rear cover support brackets to the rear of the LMS1000. See Figure 3B.
Figure 3A. Mounting the LMS1000 (List 80)
FRONT VIEW
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(2 PLACES PER SIDE)
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(1 PLACE PER SIDE SEE DETAIL A FOR LOCATIONS)
DETAIL A
GROUND
WASHER
GROUND
WASHER
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[7]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 3B. Installing LMS1000 (List 80) Rear Cover Brackets
REAR VIEW
BRACKET
P/N 528514
(2 PLACES)
6-32 X 1/2" THREAD
FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(2 PLACES PER BRACKET)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[8]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MOUNTING THE RECTIFIER MODULE SHELVES
Procedure
1.
If the Distribution Cabinet-to-Rectifier Module Shelf busbars were not installed at the factory, install them now. See Figure 4A
for details. Hand-tighten busbar hardware at this time. Hardware will be torqued to specification after busbars are connected
to the Rectifier Module Shelves in a later step.
Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the busbar.
Note:
-48V SUPPLY and RETURN busbars are identical.
2.
Remove the shield that covers the output busbars from the rear of the Rectifier Module Shelf. See Figure 4B.
3.
Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to the output busbars on the rear of the Rectifier Module Shelf and also to the
Distribution Cabinet busbars (where they will contact each other). See Figure 4A and Figure 4B.
4.
Install the Rectifier Module Shelf into the rack directly below the Distribution Cabinet or LMS1000 (if installed). See Figure 4C.
Hardware build-up is:
12-24 x 3/4" screw and flat washer, (1) set per side.
12-24 x 3/4" screw and ground washer, (1) set per side
Install the ground washers so the teeth dig into the paint on the mounting angles. Torque all screws to 65 in-lbs.
5.
Plug the connector on the cable exiting the top of the Rectifier Module Shelf with the mating connector exiting the bottom of
the Distribution Cabinet or the Rectifier Module Shelf mounted above it. See Figure 4D.
6.
Connect the system busbars that extend from the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet to the output busbars of the Rectifier
Module Shelf. See Figure 4E.
Hardware build-up is:
1/4-20 x 1" bolt
1/4" Belleville lock washer
1/4" flat washer
Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the busbar. When all Rectifier Module Shelves are installed,
torque all bolts to 60 in-lbs.
Note:
If the holes in the busbar don’t line up with holes in the Rectifier Module Shelf output busbars, loosen the busbar connections in
the Distribution Cabinet first before installing the Rectifier Module Shelf bolts.
7.
If more Rectifier Module Shelves are being installed, repeat Steps 2) through 6) for each of the additional shelves.
8.
In the Distribution Cabinet, tighten the busbar hardware to 180 in-lbs. See Figure 4A and Figure 4D.
9.
Replace the output busbar shield on the rear of all Rectifier Module Shelves.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[9]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 4A. Installing Distribution Cabinet to Rectifier Module Shelf Busbars (if not factory installed)
Distribution Cabinet
(door removed in
illustration for clarity)
Front View
Distribution Cabinet to
Rectifier Shelf Busbar Assy's.
Apply Electrical Anti-Oxidizing
Compound to Busbar Mating Surfaces.
Do Not Torque Hardware.
Leave Hardware Finger Tight.
Bottom View of Distribution Cabinet
Distribution Cabinet to
Rectifier Shelf Busbar Assy.
(Busbar Lengths Vary per Number of
Rectifier Mounting Shelves Installed)
Typical Busbar Mounting
3/8-16 x 1-1/2" Bolt
(2 places per busbar assy.)
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
(2 places per busbar assy.)
3/8" Flat Washer
(2 places per busbar assy.)
Busbar P/O
Distribution Cabinet
Side View
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[10]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 4B. Preparing Rectifier Module Shelf
Apply Electrical Anti-Oxidizing Compound to
Busbar Mating Surfaces before Mounting Shelf
Rectifier Module Shelf
Remove Shield by
Removing Four Screws
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[11]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 4C. Installing Rectifier Module Shelves
Distribution Cabinet
Rectifier Module Shelf
Mount Rectifier Module Shelves
Starting Directly Beneath Distribution
Cabinet or LMS1000 (if installed)
No. 10/12 Ground Washer
(1 place per side)
(see front view for locations)
12-24 x 3/4" Thread
Forming Hex Head
Screw (2 places per side)
(Torque to 65 in-lbs)
No. 12 Flat Washer
(1 place per side)
(see front view for locations)
Position Ground Washers
as Shown in Front View
Ground
Washer
Ground
Washer
Front View
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[12]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 4D. Cable Connections to Rectifier Module Shelf
Exploded View Shown to Illustrate Wire Connections Only
Distribution Cabinet
Plug Cable from Distribution Cabinet
into Cable from Rectifier Shelf
Rectifier Shelf
Plug Cable from Upper Rectifier Shelf
into Cable from Lower Rectifier Shelf
Rectifier Shelf
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[13]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 4E. Connecting Busbars
DO LAST
Torque Hardware Securing Busbars
inside Distribution Cabinet to
180 in-lbs (4 places)
Distribution Cabinet
Rectifier Shelf
Rectifier Shelf
Rear View
1/4" Flat Washer
(2 places per Busbar,
4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
Secure Busbars from Distribution Cabinet
to the Rear of the Rectifier Shelf as Shown.
Repeat Hardware Sequence to Secure
Longer Busbars for any Additional Shelves.
1/4" Belleville Lock Washer
(2 places per Busbar,
4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
Install All Required Hardware
then Torque to 60 in-lbs
(4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
1/4-20 x 1" Bolt
(2 places per Busbar,
4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[14]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MOUNTING LIST 63 AND 64 DC-DC CONVERTER SHELVES
If provided, mount the List 63 and List 64 DC-DC Converter Shelves in the Main Bay.
Procedure
1.
Mount the List 63 Converter Shelf to the relay rack directly beneath the bottom Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf, as shown in
Figure 5A.
2.
If a List 64 Converter Shelf is provided, mount to the relay rack directly beneath the List 63 Converter Shelf, as shown in Figure
5A.
3.
Locate the two (2) Input Interconnect Busbars provided with List 63 equipment. Install the busbars per Figure 5B. Apply
electrical anti-oxidizing compound to mating surfaces. Torque bolts as shown in the figure.
4.
If a List 64 Converter Shelf is provided, locate the two (2) Input Interconnect Busbars provided with List 64 equipment. Install
the busbars per Figure 5B. Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to mating surfaces. Torque bolts as shown in the figure.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[15]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 5A. Mounting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves
MAIN BAY ONLY
Bottom Most Rectifier Module Shelf
List 63 Converter Shelf
(See Detail A for Mounting)
List 64 Converter Shelf
(See Detail A for Mounting)
Front
#12
Ground
Washer
DETAIL A
12-24 x 1/2" Thread
Forming Screw
(4 Places)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
#12
Ground
Washer
[16]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 5B. Installing List 63 and 64 Interconnect Busbars
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Belleville Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 60 in-lbs.
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 84 in-lbs.
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Belleville Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 60 in-lbs.
Rear
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 84 in-lbs.
Notes
Remove all rear shields.
Apply electrical anti-oxidizing
compound to busbar mating surfaces.
Install all required hardware
on all busbars hand-tight,
then torque to specification.
View with
busbars installed.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[17]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Optional Battery Busbar Extension Kits, Part Nos. 514713 and 529143
These kits provide plates that extend the system busbars above the top of the Distribution Cabinet and increase the number of lug
landings available for battery cables. The Part No. 514713 kit provides back-to-back landings for up to six lugs per polarity. The Pat No.
529143 kit provides back-to-back landings for up to 12 lugs per polarity.
INSTALLING PART NO. 514713 BUSBAR KIT
This kit consists of the following:
Qty.
2
12
12
12
Part No.
Description
514712
214204100
214825000
227646800
Busbar extension plates, flat
Flat washer, 3/8” x 1” O.D.
Belleville washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4”
Perform the following steps to install the battery busbar extension plates. Refer to Figure 6 as the procedure is performed.
Procedure
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Install busbar extension plates as shown in the figure. Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces before
assembling. Tighten bolts to the recommended torque value shown in the figure.
Note:
3.
Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the busbar.
Close the Distribution Cabinet access door. The door can be shut without turning the latch.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[18]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 6. Installing Battery Busbar Extension Kit, Part No. 514713
Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces.
Install hardware, 6 places per busbar.
Assembly order:
3/8-16 X 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
Extension Plate
System Busbar
Torque to 180 In. Lbs.
FRONT VIEW
48V
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[19]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
INSTALLING PART NO. 529143 BUSBAR KIT
This kit consists of the following:
Qty.
Part No.
Description
2
529144
Busbar extension plates, angled
1
534565
Shield, battery busbar
12
214204100 Flat washer, 3/8” x 1” O.D.
12
214825000 Belleville washer, 3/8”
12
227646800 Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4”
2
218706300 Thread-forming screws, 10-32 x 1/2"
Perform the following steps to install the battery busbar extension plates. Refer to Figure 7 as the procedure is performed.
Procedure
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Install busbar extension plates as shown in the figure. Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces before
assembling. Tighten bolts to the recommended torque value shown in the figure.
Note:
3.
Note:
4.
Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the busbar.
Install the busbar shield as shown in the figure. Loosen two 10-32 screws on the top of the Distribution Cabinet. Slide slots in
the shield under the screw heads. Tighten the screws.
If the Distribution Cabinet is equipped with a List 29 top cover, use two kit-furnished 10-32 x 1/2" screws in place of the screws
described in this step.
Close the Distribution Cabinet access door. The door can be shut without turning the latch.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[20]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 7. Installing Battery Busbar Extension Kit, Part No. 529143
DO FIRST.
INSTALL BUSBAR EXTENSION PLATES
Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces.
Install hardware, 6 places per busbar.
Assembly order:
3/8-16 X 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
Extension Plate
System Busbar
Torque to 180 In. Lbs.
48V
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
DO SECOND.
INSTALL SHIELD.
Loosen two 6-32 screws
in cabinet top.
Slide slots in shield under
screw heads.
Tighten screws.
Note: If cabinet is
equipped with List 29 top
cover, replace cabinet
screws with longer screws
provided in this kit.
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[21]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Optional Lug Adapter Busbar Kits, Part Nos. 514714 and 534449
These kits provide lug adapter busbars plus hardware for use with 2-pole and 3-pole circuit breakers.
INSTALLING THE LUG ADAPTER BUSBARS
Kit P/N 534449 (for 2-pole circuit breakers) consists of the following:
Qty.
1
1
8
4
8
4
4
2
4
2
Part No.
Description
534447
534448
214110100
214112100
215111100
215111300
227640400
227646600
228557100
228567100
Busbar
Busbar
Flat washer, 1/4”
Flat washer, 3/8”
Lock washer, 1/4”
Lock washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1”
Nut, 1/4-20
Nut, 3/8-16
Kit P/N 514714 (for 3-pole circuit breakers) consists of the following:
Qty.
1
1
12
4
12
4
6
2
6
2
Part No.
Description
514676
514678
214110100
214112100
215111100
215111300
227640400
227646600
228557100
228567100
Busbar
Busbar
Flat washer, 1/4”
Flat washer, 3/8”
Lock washer, 1/4”
Lock washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1”
Nut, 1/4-20
Nut, 3/8-16
Perform the following steps to install the lug adapter busbars. Refer to Figure 8 as the procedure is performed. Note also the restrictions
on location in Figure 8.
Procedure
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Install the lug adapter busbars as shown in Figure 8. Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces before
assembling. Recommended torque is 72 in-lbs using the supplied 1/4” bolts and hardware.
3.
Orient the load lug hardware as shown in Figure 8. Recommended torque is 300 in-lbs using the supplied 3/8” bolts and
hardware.
4.
Close the Distribution Cabinet access door. The door can be shut without turning the latch.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[22]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 8. Installing Lug Adapter Busbar Kits
Busbar Adapter
Kit P/N 534449
Busbar Adapter
Kit P/N 534449
Busbar Adapter
Kit P/N 514714
Notes:
Orient busbars as shown.
Shield not shown. Remove breakaway areas from shield
as required. Breakaways are only provided for positions
1-8 and 9-12 in a 20-position panel and 1-8, 9-12, and
23-24 in a 24-position panel. This restricts 2 and 3-pole
breakers to be located in these positions only. Note also
that a shield mounting tab is located between positions
8 and 9, thus a 2 or 3-pole breaker cannot span between
positions 8 and 9.
Circuit breaker locations for reference only.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[23]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing the Optional System Load Shunt Test point Kit, P/N 545569 (if furnished)
If ordered with the power system; this kit is factory installed.
This kit adds a System Load Shunt Test Point circuit card to the Power System. This circuit card provides a series of test points for
measuring the system load shunts with a multimeter. These test points are accessible from the front of the Distribution Cabinet.
ADMONISHMENTS
Danger:
Installation of this kit should only be performed by a qualified technician following approved safety procedures.
Performing the following procedure may expose technicians to hazards. This procedure should be performed
by qualified technicians familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may
include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards:
a)
b)
c)
The tasks should be performed in the order indicated.
Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry.
Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is
present.
Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools.
Use insulated tools.
d)
e)
INSTALLING KIT
This kit consists of the following:
Qty.
1
1
1
1
3
Part No.
Description
545360
545394
545438
223772500
233394000
Test Point Circuit Card
Bracket
Label
#6-32 Locking Nut
#6-32 Screw
Perform the following steps to install the System Load Shunt Test Point Kit. Refer to Figure 9 (Main Bay) and Figure 10 (Supplemental
Bay) as this procedure is performed.
Procedure
1.
Danger:
Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the counterclockwise position.
Performing the next steps may expose service personnel to battery potential. Exercise extreme caution not to
inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact any energized electrical termination.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Remove the hardware that secures a cover plate at the mounting location of the Test Point Circuit Card Mounting Bracket.
Remove and discard the cover plate and hardware.
5.
Install the Test Point Circuit Card Mounting Bracket, and secure with a kit supplied screw and locking nut.
6.
Orient the Test Point Circuit Card over the Mounting Bracket as shown in Figure 9 (Main Bay) or Figure 10 (Supplemental Bay).
Install the Test Point Circuit Card to the Mounting Bracket, and secure with kit supplied screws.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[24]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
7.
Route the ribbon cable on the Test Point Circuit Card to the System Quad Shunt card, and plug it into J2 located on the circuit
card. Refer to Figure 9 (Main Bay) or Figure 10 (Supplemental Bay).
8.
Adhere the kit supplied label to the Distribution Cabinet lower front panel as shown in Figure 9 (Main Bay) or Figure 10
(Supplemental Bay).
9.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover to the rear. Tighten the two screws.
10. Remove the grounding wrist strap.
11. Close the Distribution Cabinet’s front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
12. Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.
13. Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[25]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 9. Installing the System Load Shunt Test Point Kit in the Main Bay
Main Bay
Rear View
Rear View
Label
1. Remove existing bracket
covering opening and replace
with kit bracket (Use kit supplied
Nut
ing
#6 Screw and #6 Locking Nut.) #6 Lock
2. Secure Test Point Circuit
Card to kit bracket with kit
supplied #6 screws.
Test Point Kit
P/N 545569
#6 Screws
3. Attach Test Point Circuit
Card ribbon cable to
System Quad Shunt Card.
Door and other
components removed
in illustration for clarity.
4. Adhere kit supplied
Test Point label.
Front View
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[26]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 10. Installing the System Load Shunt Test Point Kit in a Supplemental Bay
Supplemental Bay
Rear View
Label
Rear View
1. Remove existing bracket
covering opening and replace
Nu t
with kit bracket (Use kit supplied
ing
ock
L
#6 Screw and #6 Locking Nut.) #6
2. Secure Test Point Circuit
Card to kit bracket with kit
supplied #6 screws.
Test Point Kit
P/N 545569
#6 Screws
3. Attach Test Point Circuit
Card ribbon cable to
System Quad Shunt Card.
Door and other
components removed
in illustration for clarity.
Front View
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[27]
4. Adhere kit supplied
Test Point label.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing the List 72, List 74, List 75, List 76, List 77, List 78, or RS-485 (P/O List 80) MCA Interface Option (if
furnished)
If List 72, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, or 80 is ordered with the power system; this option is installed at the factory.
To field install these kits, refer to Section 5949. Section 5949 is furnished with each kit. Section 5949 is also provided in the hardcopy
System Installation Manual and can also be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Mounting a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe (if furnished)
Note:
For proper operation, the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe should be mounted near the batteries.
Procedure
1.
Mount the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to any suitable surface located near the battery. One 1/4inch hole is provided to mount the probe. Recommended torque is 25 in-lbs, maximum.
Mounting a TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) and Probes (if furnished)
Refer to Section 5940. Section 5940 is provided in the hardcopy System Installation Manual and can also be accessed from the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[28]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Bullet Nose Type Fuseholders and TPS/TLS Fuses (if furnished)
Refer to the illustrations in the MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS section for typical Distribution Cabinet fuse/circuit breaker position
numbering schemes.
Refer to the following procedure, and install Bullet Nose Type fuseholders and appropriately sized TPS/TLS fuses into the proper
mounting positions in the Distribution Cabinet(s). Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Bullet Nose Type fuseholders and TPS/TLS fuses may have been factory installed for you. If so, verify their positions and sizes.
Note:
Each bus in the Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum current of 500 amperes. Each Distribution Cabinet is rated for a
maximum of 500 amperes (List 21), 1000 amperes (List 22), 1500 amperes (List 23), or 2000 amperes (List 24).
Procedure
Note:
Refer to Figure 11 as this procedure is performed.
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Orient the fuseholder so the LOAD designation found on the fuseholder side is at the top, and the LINE designation is at the
bottom. Insert the terminals on the rear of the fuseholder into their corresponding sockets on the Distribution Row Assembly.
Push fuseholder in firmly until fully seated in the Distribution Row Assembly.
3.
When all fuseholders are installed, install an appropriately sized TPS/TLS fuse in each. To do this, remove the fuse carrier from
the mounted fuseholder body by pulling it straight out. Slide the fuse in place between the contacts of the fuse carrier. When
done, push the fuse carrier back into the fuseholder body. Note that a polarizing key on the bottom of the carrier prevents the
carrier from being inserted upside down.
4.
Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
5.
Verify that an 18/100 ampere alarm fuse is present in each fuseholder, and that a plastic safety cover is installed on this fuse.
Refer to SAG582126000 for part numbers.
6.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fasteners.
Figure 11. Installing a Bullet Nose Type Fuseholder and TPS/TLS Fuse
Insert These Terminals
in Corresponding Sockets
in Distribution Assembly.
Distribution Fuse
Fuse Carrier
Safety
Cover
Polarizing Keyway
Matches Key on
Bottom of Fuse Carrier
Fuseholder Body
Alarm Fuse
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[29]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breakers (if furnished)
Refer to the illustrations in the MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS section for typical Distribution Cabinet fuse/circuit breaker position
numbering schemes.
Caution:
Circuit breakers with a rating greater than 150 amperes SHALL HAVE an empty mounting position between it
and any other overcurrent protective device.
Refer to the following procedure, and install appropriately sized Bullet Nose type circuit breakers into the proper mounting positions in
the Distribution Cabinet(s). Record all circuit breaker sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Bullet Nose Type circuit breakers may have been factory installed for you. If so, verify their positions and sizes.
Note:
Each bus in the Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum current of 500 amperes. Each Distribution Cabinet is rated for a
maximum of 500 amperes (List 21), 1000 amperes (List 22), 1500 amperes (List 23), or 2000 amperes (List 24).
Procedure
Note:
Refer to Figure 12 as this procedure is performed.
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Ensure that the circuit breaker is in the OFF position, and is of the correct rating. Orient the circuit breaker so the OFF and ON
labeling on the handle is right side up. Insert the terminals on the rear of the circuit breaker into their corresponding sockets on
the Distribution Row Assembly. Push circuit breaker in firmly until fully seated in the Distribution Row Assembly.
3.
Record all circuit breaker sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
4.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fasteners.
Figure 12. Installing a Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breaker
Insert These Terminals
in Corresponding Sockets
in Distribution Assembly.
Lettering on Handle
Must Be Right Side Up.
Turn Off Before Installing.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[30]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly (P/N 509128) On A Bullet Nose Type Distribution Assembly (if
furnished)
The GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly is provided in a kit, P/N 514432, which consists of...
(1) GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly (P/N 509128)
(1) Ground Return Busbar Link (P/N 514420)
(1) Insulator (P/N 528401)
(1) 1/4-20 x 1/2” Hex Head Machine Screw
(1) 1/4-20 Hex Nut
(2) 1/4” Flat Washers
(2) 1/4” Lock Washers
(1) 1/4-20 x 3/8" Screw
(2) GND Symbol Label (P/N 317304400)
Refer to the following procedure to install the kit. Then install appropriately sized GMT fuses into the fuseholders on the GMT Fuse
Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Note:
Each P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly is rated for a maximum current of 30 amperes.
Procedure
Note:
1.
Note:
Refer to Figure 13 as this procedure is performed.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
Each P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly occupies five mounting positions on a Bullet Nose Type
Distribution Row Assembly. It is recommended that the fuse assembly be mounted starting at the right side of the distribution
row.
2.
Ensure that no load connections have been made to the five Bullet Nose Type mounting positions into which the P/N 509128
GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly will be installed.
3.
Orient the P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly as shown in Figure 13. Insert the four terminals on the rear
of the assembly into their corresponding sockets on the Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly. Push the GMT Fuse
Distribution Circuit Card Assembly in firmly until fully seated in the Distribution Row Assembly.
4.
On the Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly, connect a furnished busbar link between the ground busbar and either of
the two linking busbars as shown in Figure 13. Secure with the hardware furnished. Recommended torque is 72 in-lbs.
5.
Install the furnished P/N 528401 insulator over the busbars above the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. See detail
in Figure 13. Secure with the furnished screw.
6.
Adhere the GND Symbol labels to the insulator as shown in Figure 13.
7.
Install an appropriately sized GMT fuse in each fuse mounting position on the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly as
required. If dummy fuses are installed, first remove the dummy fuse.
8.
Record all fuse sizes (installed on the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly) on the card provided within the Distribution
Cabinet(s).
9.
Verify that a 1/4 ampere alarm fuse is present in fuse position F11 of the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. Refer to
SAG582126000 for part number.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[31]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
10. Verify that a plastic safety cover is installed on all GMT fuses on the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. Refer to
SAG582126000 for part number.
11. Verify that dummy fuses are installed in all unused fuse positions on the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly.
12. Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fasteners.
Figure 13. Installing a P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly on a Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
NOT
USED
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
NOT LOAD
CONNECTIONS.
USE LINK TO
CONNECT
EITHER ONE
TO GROUND
BUSBAR. (SEE
DETAIL BELOW.)
GROUND
BUSBAR
GMT FUSE DISTRIBUTION
CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY
P/N 509128
GND Symbol Label
INSTALLING
INSULATOR
NOTE:
List AA Distribution Assembly shown
as an example. Procedure same for
all other Bullet Nose Type Distribution
Assemblies.
BUSBAR LINK
INSTALLED
GMT Fuse Circuit Card Assembly
shown in recommended location for
first assembly. Procedure same for all
other mounting locations.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[32]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing TPH Fuses (if furnished)
Refer to the illustrations in the MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS section for typical Distribution Cabinet fuse/circuit breaker position
numbering schemes.
Refer to the following procedure, and install appropriately sized TPH fuses into the proper fuseholders in the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
TPH fuses may have been factory installed for you. If so, verify their positions and sizes.
Note:
Each bus in the Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum current of 500 amperes. Each Distribution Cabinet is rated for a
maximum of 500 amperes (List 21), 1000 amperes (List 22), 1500 amperes (List 23), or 2000 amperes (List 24).
Procedure
Note:
Refer to Figure 14 as this procedure is performed.
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Remove the TPH fuse carrier from the mounted fuseholder body by grasping its handle and firmly pulling it straight out. Install
the TPH fuse into the fuse carrier. When done, push the fuse carrier securely back into the mounted fuseholder body.
3.
Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
4.
Verify that a 1/4 ampere alarm fuse is installed in the GMT-type fuseholder located adjacent to the TPH fuseholder, and that a
plastic safety cover is install on this fuse. Refer to SAG582126000 for part numbers.
5.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fasteners.
Figure 14. Installing a TPH Fuse
Fuse
Fuseholder Body
Fuse Carrier
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[33]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Setting Wiring Options
Admonishments
GENERAL SAFETY
Danger:
TECHNICIANS MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY PROCEDURES.
Performing the following procedures may expose technicians to hazards. These procedures should be
performed by qualified technicians familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These
hazards may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
The tasks should be performed in the order indicated.
Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry.
Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is
present.
Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools.
Use insulated tools.
(To avoid danger to the installer or damage to the equipment, the tools used in this procedure should have insulated grips. All
exposed metal shafts, extensions, handles, etc. should be completely insulated with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of
electrical tape. Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end exposed.)
VOLTAGES
AC Input Voltages
Danger:
This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock.
DC Input/Output Voltages
Danger:
This system produces DC Power and may require battery to be connected to it. Although the DC voltage is not
hazardously high, the Rectifier Modules and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme
caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire
connected to a battery terminal. NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one
termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary
short circuit can cause explosion and injury.
CIRCUIT CARD HANDLING
Warning:
Installation or removal of the circuit cards requires careful handling. Before handling any circuit card, read
and follow the instructions contained on the Static Warning Page located at the beginning of this document.
To avoid possibility of circuit card damage from static discharge, a static wrist strap grounded through a one
megohm resistor should always be worn when handling the circuit cards.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[34]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Wiring Options on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 Located in Distribution Cabinet(s)
Perform the following procedures to verify the factory settings and/or make the required wiring option settings per your site
requirements. These procedures can also be used to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
ACCESSING INTERCONNECT/LVD INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD P/N 509532
Procedure
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
3.
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SENSING AND INTERNAL/EXTERNAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE METER READING CIRCUIT CARD P/N 500476
ORIENTATION
Circuit card P/N 500476 is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet
(the one containing the MCA). Refer to Figure 15.
The orientation of this circuit card determines...
•
If the Rectifier Modules are sensing output voltage through internal 'Distribution' wiring (internal), or at a location connected to
the system via the external voltage sensing leads (external).
•
If the voltage source the MCA displays as "System Output Voltage" is the voltage source connected through the internal
'Distribution' wiring (internal), or the voltage source connected to the system via the external system voltage meter reading
leads (external).
Procedures are provided later in these instructions detailing connection of external voltage sensing leads and external system voltage
meter reading leads.
Orient this circuit card per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note:
A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this procedure only on the circuit card located in the
Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. The orientation of circuit card P/N 500476 on circuit card P/N 509532 located in a Supplemental
Bay Distribution Cabinet has no effect.
1.
If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet
(the one containing the MCA).
3.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate the Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External System Voltage Meter Reading circuit
card P/N 500476 installed on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 at J4.
4.
For Internal Voltage Sensing and Internal System Voltage Meter Reading: Orient the circuit card so that the SENSE ARROW
points to INT.
For External Voltage Sensing and External System Voltage Meter Reading: Orient the circuit card so that the SENSE ARROW
points to EXT.
5.
If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final Procedure" procedure described below.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[35]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
FUSES AND FUSE ALARM POLARITY CIRCUIT CARD P/N 500477 ORIENTATION
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
Circuit card P/N 500477 is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in each Distribution Cabinet. Refer to
Figure 15.
The orientation of this circuit card sets the proper polarity for the fuses and fuse alarm circuits.
Orient this circuit card as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note:
A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this procedure on the circuit card located in each
Distribution Cabinet.
1.
If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in each Distribution Cabinet.
3.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate the Fuses and Fuse Alarm circuit card P/N 500477 installed on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit
card P/N 509532 at J7.
4.
Orient the circuit card so that the SYSTEM ARROW points to -48V. (System distribution voltage in this power system is -48V.)
5.
If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final Procedure" procedure described below.
6.
If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets, set this option as required on each cabinet.
LVD (J5) JUMPER
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
This jumper is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in each Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 15.
Set this jumper as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note:
A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this procedure on the circuit card located in each
Distribution Cabinet.
1.
If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in each Distribution Cabinet.
3.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate connector J5 on this circuit card.
4.
If the Distribution Cabinet that contains this circuit card:
•
Is the last cabinet that contains Low Voltage Disconnect circuit cards, or if the system only consists of this cabinet and
contains Low Voltage Disconnect circuit cards, place the supplied jumper between pins 1 and 2 of J5.
•
Has NO Low Voltage Disconnect circuit cards, or contains Low Voltage Disconnect circuit cards but is NOT the last cabinet
in the system, place the supplied jumper on pins 2 and 3 of J5.
5.
If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final Procedure" procedure described below.
6.
If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets, set this option as required on each cabinet.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[36]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
SHUNT POD (J6) JUMPER
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
This jumper is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in each Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 15.
Set this jumper as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note:
A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this procedure on the circuit card located in each
Distribution Cabinet.
1.
If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in each Distribution Cabinet.
3.
Refer to Figure 15, and locate connector J6 on this circuit card.
4.
If the Distribution Cabinet containing this circuit card:
•
DOES NOT contain a Shunt POD circuit card, place the supplied jumper between pins 1 and 2 of J6.
•
DOES contain a Shunt POD circuit card, place the supplied jumper between pins 2 and 3 of J6.
5.
If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final Procedure" procedure described below.
6.
If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets, set this option as required in each cabinet.
FINAL PROCEDURE
Procedure
1.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
2.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
3.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[37]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 15. Wiring Options on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
Internal/External
Voltage Sensing and
Internal/External
System Voltage
Meter Reading
Circuit Card
P/N 500476
J6 Jumper Settings
BAY HAS
SHUNT POD
CIRCUIT CARD
BAY DOES
NOT HAVE
SHUNT POD
CIRCUIT CARD
3
3
2
2
1
1
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT
CARD, P/N 509532
J13
J8
J10
J9
Fuses and Fuse Alarm
Polarity Circuit Card
P/N 500477
J3
-48V
J1
J7
INT.
J2
J4
J5 Jumper Settings
BAY HAS
NO LVD OR IS
NOT LAST LVD
IN SYSTEM
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
BAY HAS THE
ONLY LVD OR
THE LAST LVD
IN SYSTEM
3
3
2
2
1
1
J5 J6
+24V
EXT.
J12
[38]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 though S4 Settings
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
The MCA provides three separate LVD disconnect levels (with separate A and B side adjustable setpoints for each level) and one
adjustable global reconnect setpoint. The levels are designated LVD1, LVD2, and LVD3.
A Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card P/N 509477 is provided in each Distribution Cabinet that…
•
Contains one or more distribution rows having an LVD contactor, or
•
Controls an LVD contactor located on an associated Battery Stand.
Four switches, S1-S4, are provided on each Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card. The setting of these switches determines which of
the three available disconnect levels controls the contactor in the corresponding distribution row or battery stand, as shown in Table 1.
Refer to Figure 16 for location of switches S1-S4 on circuit card P/N 509477.
Set these switches as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover. Then
lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Refer to Figure 16, and locate Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card P/N 509477. Locate switches S1 through S4 on the
circuit card.
5.
Set the switches per Table 1. Be sure to set all four switches on the circuit card, regardless of the number of LVD contactors
and/or distribution rows in the cabinet.
6.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
7.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
8.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
9.
If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets containing (or controlling) LVD contactor(s), set the switches on the Quad
Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card installed in these cabinets as required.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[39]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Table 1.
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 - S4 Settings
Switch S1
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 1
or an Associated Battery Stand, if present
Setting
Section 1 of S1
Section 2 of S1
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
OFF
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
OFF
ON
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
ON
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
ON
ON
Switch S2
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 2, if present
Setting
Section 1 of S2
Section 2 of S2
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
OFF
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
OFF
ON
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
ON
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
ON
ON
Switch S3
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 3, if present
Setting
Section 1 of S3
Section 2 of S3
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
OFF
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
OFF
ON
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
ON
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
ON
ON
Switch S4
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 4, if present
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Setting
Section 1 of S4
Section 2 of S4
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
OFF
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
OFF
ON
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
ON
OFF
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
ON
ON
[40]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 16. Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 - S4 Location
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
QUAD LVD CIRCUIT
CARD, P/N 509477
SWITCH S2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SECTION 1
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 2
SECTION 1
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 2
ON
OFF
SWITCH S4
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
SWITCH S1
[41]
OFF
ON
SWITCH S3
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm Circuit Card P/N 524734 Jumpers J10 and J11 Settings (List 71 Only)
NOTE THAT LIST 10 AND 11 MCA's PROVIDE AUDIBLE ALARM RELAY CONTACTS. LIST 12 AND 13 MCA's DO NOT. AN AUDIBLE ALARM IS
ONLY AVAILABLE WHEN LIST 10 OR 11 MCA IS FURNISHED.
List 71 provides Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm circuit card P/N 524734 installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. This circuit
card contains a local audible alarm sounding device, plus connection points for a remote audible alarm sounding device (List 10 and 11
MCA's only). Located on this circuit card are jumpers J10 and J11. Placement of these jumpers determines if the local or remote audible
alarm sounding device is active.
Caution:
List 12 and List 13 MCA's do not provide an audible alarm function. For correct external alarm operation,
jumpers J10 and J11 must be set to the REMOTE position when the power system is equipped with List 12 or
List 13 MCA.
Refer to Figure 17 for location of jumpers J10 and J11 on circuit card P/N 524734.
Set the jumpers per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1.
Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Refer to Figure 17, and locate Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm circuit card P/N 524734 mounted in the Main Bay Distribution
Cabinet.
5.
Refer to Figure 17, and locate connectors J10 and J11 on this circuit card.
•
For LOCAL audible alarm operation: Place the jumper on J10 between pins 1 and 2. Place the jumper on J11 between pins 1
and 2.
•
For REMOTE audible alarm operation: Place the jumper on J10 between pins 2 and 3. Place the jumper on J11 between pins
2 and 3.
(Use this setting if the power system contains a List 12 or List 13 MCA.)
6.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
7.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
8.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[42]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 17. Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm Circuit Card P/N 509539 Jumpers J10 and J11 Location
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
ALARM TERMINATION/
AUDIBLE ALARM
CIRCUIT CARD,
P/N 524734
1
2
J4
J5
3
J3
1
Select
Local
Alarm
J10
2
3
J11
or
J8
1
2
J1
J10 J11
J2
3
J10
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[43]
1
Select
Remote
Alarm
2
3
J11
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MCA Local and Remote Access Lockout Switch S1 Settings on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card (Main Bay
Only)
The MCA Main Controller circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet contains switch S1. This switch allows you to
enable/disable changing system settings via the MCA's Local Interface Pad (locally) and enable/disable changing system settings via the
MCA's remote interface port(s) (remotely).
Refer to Figure 18 for switch S1 location.
Set the switch settings per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note:
When performing any step in this procedure that requires removal of existing hardware, retain all hardware for use in
subsequent steps.
1.
Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Locate the metal bracket that is under the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card. Loosen but do not remove the four Phillips
screws that secure the metal bracket. Remove the metal bracket with the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card by sliding toward
the rear of the MCA assembly until the screw heads clear the slots in the bracket. Lift the bracket and circuit card to gain access
to switch S1 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card that is beneath the bracket.
5.
Refer to Figure 18, and locate switch S1 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card.
•
To disable changing system settings locally, place section 2 of S1 in the ON position.
To enable changing system settings locally, place section 2 of S1 in the OFF position.
•
To disable changing system settings remotely, place switch 3 of S1 in the ON position.
To enable changing system settings remotely, place switch 3 of S1 in the OFF position.
6.
Reinstall the previously removed metal bracket and Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card. To do so, place the bracket on its four
mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through the slots in the bracket. Slide the bracket toward the front of
the MCA assembly. Tighten the four screws.
7.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
8.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
9.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[44]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 18. Location of MCA Remote and Local Access Lockout Switch S1 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card
S1
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
OFF
1
SECTION 1 OF S1
(UNDEFINED)
2
SECTION 2 OF S1
LOCAL ACCESS
OFF = ENABLED
3
SECTION 3 OF S1
REMOTE ACCESS
OFF = ENABLED
ON = DISABLED
4
SECTION 4 OF S1
(UNDEFINED)
ON = DISABLED
ON
SWITCH S1 (LOCATED
BENEATH CIRCUIT CARD
AND METAL SHIELD)
LOOSEN (4) SCREWS TO
REMOVE CIRCUIT CARD
AND METAL SHIELD
Rectifier Shelf
Interface Circuit
Card and Metal Shield
MCA
Main Controller
Circuit Card
Main Bay Panel
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[45]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MCA Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main Bay Only)
This jumper is located on the Modem circuit card (if furnished). This circuit card is located in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
The placement of this jumper determines the number of rings before the modem answers an incoming telephone call.
Refer to Figure 19 for jumper location.
Set this jumper per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1.
Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Refer to Figure 19, and locate J3 on the Modem circuit card.
Note:
•
To set the modem to answer on 1 ring, remove the jumper from the two pins of J3. The jumper may be stored on one of
the pins. This is the factory setting.
•
To set the modem to answer on 5 rings, place the jumper provided on the two pins of J3.
When the MCA modem is set to answer on 5 rings, add the following to the end of the modem initialization string set in
WinLink: S7=60.
5.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
6.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[46]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 19. Modem Circuit Card "Number of Rings before Answer" Jumper Location
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
MODEM
CIRCUIT CARD,
P/N 486781300
J3, "Number
of Rings Before
Answer" Jumper
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[47]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main Bay Only)
This jumper is located on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly (if furnished). This circuit card is located in the Main Bay Distribution
Cabinet.
The placement of this jumper determines the number of rings before the modem answers an incoming telephone call.
Refer to Figure 20 for jumper location.
Set this jumper per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1.
Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Refer to Figure 20, and locate J3 on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly.
Note:
•
To set the modem to answer on 1 ring, remove the jumper from the pins 1 and 2 of J3. The jumper may be stored on one of
the pins.
•
To set the modem to answer on 5 rings, place the jumper provided between pins 1 and 2 of J3.
When the MCA modem is set to answer on 5 rings, add the following to the end of the modem initialization string set in
WinLink: S7=60.
5.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
6.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[48]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "RS-232 Port Hardware Handshake" Jumper (Main Bay Only)
This jumper is located on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly (if furnished). This circuit card is located in the Main Bay Distribution
Cabinet.
The placement of this jumper determines if the RS-232 Port Hardware Handshaking is enabled or disabled.
Refer to Figure 20 for jumper location.
Set this jumper per site requirements as described in the following procedure. Note that for use with WinLink, Hardware Handshaking is
not required.
Procedure
1.
Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Refer to Figure 20, and locate J3 on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly.
•
To enable Hardware Handshaking, remove the jumper from the pins 3 and 4 of J3. The jumper may be stored on one of the
pins.
•
To disable Hardware Handshaking, place the jumper provided between pins 3 and 4 of J3.
5.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
6.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[49]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 20. RS-232/Modem Circuit Card Assembly "Modem Number of Rings Before Answering" and "RS-232 Port Hardware Handshake" Jumper
Locations
VIEW WITH DOOR
OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM
OF CABINET
MODEM/RS-232
INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
1
J3 Pins 3 and 4
RS-232 Port
Hardware
Handshake
J3 Pins 1 and 2
Modem Port
Number of Rings
before Answer
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Jumper OFF:
RTS/CTS
Hardware
Handshake
5
Jumper ON:
NO
Hardware
Handshake
Jumper OFF:
One (1)
Ring
6
9
4
3
2
1
RS-232/Modem
Assembly
J3
Jumper ON:
Five (5)
Rings
[50]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
List RD and RE Shunt Monitoring (Shunt POD) Circuit Card Switch Settings
List RD and RE are equipped with a Shunt Monitoring (Shunt POD) Circuit Card, P/N 501981. The MCA is capable of monitoring up to
sixteen shunts. The MCA separately identifies shunts connected to system voltage distribution, those connected to subsystem voltage
distribution, and those connected to battery. To access the Shunt POD circuit card in a List RD or RE, remove the rear cover from the
assembly (shown removed in Figure 21). Reinstall cover after switch settings have been checked.
SHUNT CAPACITY SELECTION SWITCHES
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
Located on each Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981 are two switches. These switches allow the Shunt POD circuit card to be used with a
variety of shunt sizes. The switches are factory set to match the shunt factory connected to the circuit card. The following procedure is
provided to check the factory setting, or to set the switches on a replacement Shunt POD.
Procedure
1.
Refer to Figure 21, and locate Switches S1 and S2 on Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981.
2.
Refer to Table 2, and set the switches to match the capacity of the shunt connected to this circuit card.
Note:
Factory setting of this switch is as follows (2000A/25mV.):
Switch S2 Section 3: “Open”
Switch S1: “C”
SHUNT POD IDENTIFICATION SWITCH
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
Located on each Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981 is a DIP switch. The settings of two sections of this DIP switch determines how the
MCA identifies this Shunt POD (and the shunt connected to it). The Shunt POD can be identified as monitoring system load current,
subsystem load current, or battery current. This switch is factory set. The following procedure is provided to check the factory setting, or
to set the switch on a replacement Shunt POD. Refer to Figure 21 for circuit card location and switch identification.
Note:
Section 1 of switch S2 is not used in this assembly.
Procedure
1.
Refer to Figure 21, and locate Switch S2 on Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981.
2.
Refer to Table 3 and set switch S2 for the type of shunt.
Note:
Factory setting of these switch sections is for “+ Battery Current”.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[51]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Table 2.
Table 3.
Shunt POD Circuit Card P/N 501981 Shunt Capacity Selection Switch Settings
Switch S2
Section 3
Position
Switch
S1
Position
25mV.
Shunt
Capacity
50mV.
Shunt
Capacity
Switch S2
Section 3
Position
Switch
S1
Position
25mV.
Shunt
Capacity
50mV.
Shunt
Capacity
Open
0
50A
100A
Closed
0
400A
800A
Open
1
100A
200A
Closed
1
650A
1300A
Open
2
150A
300A
Closed
2
1200A
2400A
Open
3
200A
400A
Closed
3
1250A
2500A
Open
4
250A
500A
Closed
4
1300A
2600A
Open
5
300A
600A
Closed
5
1600A
3200A
Open
6
400A
800A
Closed
6
2000A
4000A
Open
7
500A
1000A
Closed
7
2600A
5200A
Open
8
600A
1200A
Closed
8
3000A
6000A
Open
9
800A
1600A
Closed
9
3750A
7500A
Open
A
1000A
2000A
Closed
A
4000A
8000A
Open
B
1500A
3000A
Closed
B
5000A
10000A
Open
C
2000A
4000A
Closed
C
6000A
12000A
Open
D
2500A
5000A
Closed
D
7500A
15000A
Open
E
4000A
8000A
Closed
E
8000A
16000A
Open
F
5000A
10000A
Closed
F
10000A
20000A
Shunt POD Circuit Card P/N 501981 Shunt Type Identification Switch Settings
Switch S2
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Section 2
Section 4
Open
Open
Shunt Type
+ Battery Current
Open
Closed
– Battery Current
Closed
Open
System Load Current
Closed
Closed
Subsystem Load Current
[52]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 21. List RD and RE Shunt POD Circuit Card Switch Location
REAR VIEW OF LIST RD
(COVER REMOVED)
OPEN
1
2
3
4
CLOSED
SHUNT MONITORING (SHUNT POD)
CIRCUIT CARD (PART NO. 501981)
3 4
SWITCH
S1
1
2
SWITCH
S2
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[53]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card P/N 535250 Switches S1 and S2 Settings
Note:
This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to verify the settings or to make adjustments on
a replacement circuit card.
A Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card is installed in each bay. Two switches (S1 and S2) are provided on this circuit card. The setting of
these switches determines the bays beginning rectifier addressing number.
Refer to Figure 22 for location of switches S1 and S2 on circuit card P/N 535250.
Set these switches as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1.
Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning:
Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3.
Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
4.
Refer to Figure 22, and locate switches S1 and S2 on the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card. Set the switches in the main bay as
follows: set switch S2 to 0 and switch S1 to 1 (this sets rectifier addressing in this bay starting at 01). Set the switches in the
supplemental bay as follows: set switch S2 to 4 and switch S1 to 1 (this sets rectifier addressing in this bay starting at 41). Note
that when a rectifier is replaced with a new rectifier, it is initially assigned the next available address respective to that bay. You
then are prompted to replace the new rectifier with the old address. That is why rectifier addressing in the supplemental bay
starts at 41 instead of 37.
5.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
6.
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[54]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 22. Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card P/N 535250 Switches S1 and S2 Location
S2
S1
6
5
4
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[55]
7 8
3 2
9
0
1
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Making Electrical Connections
Admonishments
Danger:
INSTALLERS MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY PROCEDURES.
This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock. AC input power must be
completely disconnected from the branch circuits wiring used to provide power to the system before any
electrical connections are made. DO NOT apply AC power to the system until all electrical connections have
been completed and checked.
This system may also require battery to be connected. Although battery voltage is not hazardously high, the
battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any
tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a battery terminal. NEVER allow a
metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a
termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury. Remove
watches, rings, or other jewelry before connecting battery leads. Make the DC (battery) connections last. Make
all other electrical connections without DC input power applied to the system.
Wiring Considerations
For wire size, branch circuit protection, crimp lug, and general wiring recommendations; refer to System Application Guide
SAG582126000. The SAG can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
All wiring and branch circuit protection should follow the current edition of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) approved
National Fire Protection Association's (NPFA) National Electrical Code (NEC), and applicable local codes. For operation in countries where
the NEC is not recognized, follow applicable codes.
Relay Rack Grounding Connection (Frame Ground)
Note:
Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for crimp lugs. Refer to drawing 031110100 for lug crimping information.
Refer to drawings 031110200 and 031110300 for additional lug information. The SAG and Engineering Drawings can be
accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system. A copy of drawings 031110100,
031110200, and 031110300 are also located in the hardcopy INSTALLATION MANUAL for your convenience.
For relay rack grounding requirements, refer to the current edition of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) approved
National Fire Protection Association's (NPFA) National Electrical Code (NEC), applicable local codes, and your specific site requirements.
A customer's grounding network lead can be attached to the top of each relay rack. Provision is made for installing a lead with a two-hole
lug that has 1/4" bolt clearance holes on 5/8" centers. When using 1/4-inch hardware, recommended torque is 84 in-lbs when a standard
flat washer and lock washer are used.
Note:
The DC return connection to this system can remain isolated from system frame and chassis (DC-I).
Note:
This system is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network (CBN).
External Connections to List 80 LMS1000 Monitoring System (If Furnished)
Refer to the separate documentation provided with the LMS1000.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[56]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
AC Input and AC Input Equipment Grounding Connections
Note:
Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 and Power Data Sheet PD588705000 for recommended wire size and
branch circuit protection. These can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
CONNECTIONS TO 588705000 LIST 11 (SINGLE-PHASE) RECTIFIER MODULE MOUNTING SHELVES
Spec No. 588705000 List 11 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf is provided with six (6) factory installed AC input line cords (one for each
Rectifier Module position). Plug each AC line cord into a properly wired AC outlet or distribution box. Refer to Figure 23.
Figure 23. AC Input Connections to a 588705000 List 11 (Single Phase) Rectifier Mounting Shelf
Rectifier
Module 4
Rectifier
Module 5
Rear View
Rectifier
Module 6
Rectifier
Module 1
Rectifier
Module 2
Rectifier
Module 3
Note: Rectifier Module mounting positions are numbered
left to right as viewed from front of shelf.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[57]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTIONS TO 588705000 LIST 1 (SINGLE-PHASE) RECTIFIER MODULE MOUNTING SHELVES (WHEN 582126000 LIST 45 AC
INPUT TERMINATION PANEL IS NOT PROVIDED)
Spec No. 588705000 List 1 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf provides a separate AC input connection for each Rectifier Module. Circular
openings are provided in the side panels (side feed) and rear covers (rear feed) of the Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf for AC input and
AC input equipment grounding conductors. The openings accept 3/4" inch conduit fittings. It is recommended that AC input wiring be
provided to all Rectifier Module mounting positions, including currently unused positions. This wiring will ease future installation of
Rectifier Modules to meet increased load requirements.
Note:
A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 24 as these procedures are performed.
Note:
Repeat the following procedures for each Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf in the Power System.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1.
Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the rear of the Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf by first removing the screws that
secure them.
2.
Install conduit fittings in the side or rear openings as required. Plug buttons are provided, and must be installed in the openings
not being used.
3.
Route wiring into the shelf through the previously installed conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note:
1.
In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting positions are number 1-6 from left to right as viewed from the front.
Make AC input connections as shown in Table 4. Connect each wire by inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and
then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 10 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note:
1.
Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch circuit neutral conductor.
Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the frame ground studs using installer-provided ring lugs and factory-supplied
mounting hardware. Recommended torque is 23 in-lbs.
Reinstalling Covers
1.
Table 4.
After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access
Covers on the back of the shelf. Secure with the previously removed screws.
AC Input Connections to a 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Left Side as
Viewed from Rear
PCU 4
PCU 5
PCU 6
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
1
2
1
2
1
208/240 VAC Service Type:
Line to Line:
•
Connect Line 1 to Terminal 1.
Connect Line 2 to Terminal 2.
•
Line to Neutral:
Connect Line to Terminal 1.
Connect Neutral to Terminal 2.
2
Right Side as
Viewed from Rear
1
2
1
2
1
2
[58]
PCU 1
PCU 2
PCU 3
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 24. AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to a 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear View
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear View
Rectifier
Module 4
AC
IN
Rectifier
Module 5
Rectifier
Module 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
ONE 10-32 X 3/4" STUD
AND HARDWARE,
PER SIDE
1
PCU 1
2
1
PCU 2
2
1
PCU 3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Rectifier
Module 1
Rectifier
Module 2
AC
IN
Rectifier
Module 3
Note: Rectifier Module mounting positions are numbered
left to right as viewed from front of shelf.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[59]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTIONS TO 582126000 LIST 45 (SINGLE-PHASE) TOP MOUNT AC INPUT TERMINATION PANEL
582126000 List 45 consists of a pre-wired, top-mount, AC input termination panel. The panel provides a separate AC input connection
for each Rectifier Module (6 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves per bay, 6 Rectifier Modules per shelf, for a total of 36 AC input feeds per
bay). Circular openings are provided in the top of the panel for AC input and AC input grounding conductors. The openings accept 3/4"
inch conduit fittings. It is recommended that AC input wiring be provided to all Rectifier Module mounting positions, including currently
unused positions. This wiring will ease future installation of Rectifier Modules to meet increased load requirements.
Note:
A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 25 as these procedures are performed.
Note:
Wiring to Rectifier Module Mounting Positions 1-3 in each shelf are made in the left-hand side of the top access panel. Wiring to
Rectifier Module Mounting Positions 4-6 in each shelf are made in the right-hand side of the top access panel, as viewed from
the front of the system.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1.
Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the AC Input Termination Panel by first loosening the captive fastener that
secures each of them.
2.
Install conduit fittings as required in the top of the AC Input Termination Panel. Plug buttons are provided, and must be
installed in the openings not being used.
3.
Route wiring into the AC Input Termination Panel through the previously installed conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note:
1.
In each rack, Rectifier Module shelves are numbered 1-6 from top to bottom. In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting
positions are number 1-6 from left to right as viewed from the front.
Make AC input connections as shown in Table 5. Connect each wire by inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and
then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 10 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note:
1.
Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch circuit neutral conductor.
Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the GND BAR terminal blocks provided. Connect each wire by inserting the
stripped end into the wire opening, and then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 25 in-lbs.
Reinstalling Covers
1.
After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access
Covers. Secure each by tightening the captive fasteners.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[60]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Table 5.
AC Input Connections to a 582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel
Left Side AC Input Termination Panel
Shelf 1
PCU 1
1
2
PCU 2
1
2
Shelf 2
PCU 3
1
PCU 1
2
1
2
Shelf 3
PCU 1
1
2
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 1
2
PCU 2
1
2
2
PCU 3
1
2
Shelf 4
PCU 3
1
PCU 1
2
1
2
Shelf 5
1
PCU 2
1
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
Shelf 6
PCU 3
1
PCU 1
2
1
2
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
Right Side AC Input Termination Panel
Shelf 2
PCU 4
1
2
PCU 5
1
2
Shelf 1
PCU 6
1
PCU 4
2
1
2
Shelf 4
PCU 4
1
2
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 4
•
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
2
PCU 5
1
2
2
PCU 6
1
2
Shelf 3
PCU 6
1
PCU 4
2
1
2
Shelf 6
1
PCU 5
1
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
Shelf 5
PCU 6
1
PCU 4
2
1
•
Line to Line:
Connect Line 1 to Terminal 1.
Connect Line 2 to Terminal 2.
[61]
2
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
Line to Neutral:
Connect Line to Terminal 1.
Connect Neutral to Terminal 2.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 25. AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to a 582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel
See
Detail A
See
Detail B
Rear
Rectifier (PCU) Shelves are Number
from #1 to #6 from Top to Bottom
Rectifiers (PCUs) are Numbered
from #1 to #6 from Left to Right
as Viewed from the Front of the System
GND
BAR
AC Cover
Removed
in Illustration
PCU4
1
2
PCU4
1
2
PCU4
1
2
SHELF 2
PCU5
1
2
SHELF 4
PCU5
1
2
SHELF 6
PCU5
1
2
PCU6
1
2
PCU6
1
2
PCU6
1
2
PCU4
1
2
PCU4
1
2
PCU4
1
2
SHELF 1
PCU5
1
2
SHELF 3
PCU5
1
2
SHELF 5
PCU5
1
2
PCU6
1
2
PCU1
1
2
PCU6
1
2
PCU1
1
2
PCU6
1
2
PCU1
1
2
Inside View
Detail A
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
GND
BAR
AC Cover
Removed
in Illustration
SHELF 1
PCU2
1
2
SHELF 3
PCU2
1
2
SHELF 5
PCU2
1
2
PCU3
1
2
PCU3
1
2
PCU3
1
2
PCU1
1
2
PCU1
1
2
PCU1
1
2
SHELF 2
PCU2
1
2
SHELF 4
PCU2
1
2
SHELF 6
PCU2
1
2
PCU3
1
2
PCU3
1
2
PCU3
1
2
Inside View
Detail B
[62]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTIONS TO 588705000 LIST 3 (THREE-PHASE) RECTIFIER MODULE MOUNTING SHELVES (WHEN 582126000 LIST 46 AC INPUT
TERMINATION PANEL IS NOT PROVIDED)
Spec. No. 588705000 List 3 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf provides two 3-phase AC input circuits. Each phase of each input circuit
supplies one Rectifier Module. Circular openings are provided in the side panels (side feed) and rear covers (rear feed) of the Rectifier
Module Mounting Shelf for AC input and AC input equipment grounding conductors. The openings accept 3/4" inch conduit fittings. It is
recommended that AC input wiring be provided to all Rectifier Module mounting positions, including currently unused positions. This
wiring will ease future installation of Rectifier Modules to meet increased load requirements.
Note:
A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 26 as these procedures are performed.
Note:
Repeat the following procedures for each Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf in the Power System.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1.
Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the rear of the Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf by first removing the screws that
secure them.
2.
Install conduit fittings in the side or rear openings as required. Plug buttons are provided, and must be installed in the openings
not being used.
3.
Route wiring into the shelf through the previously installed conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note:
1.
In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting positions are number 1-6 from left to right as viewed from the front.
Make AC input connections as shown in Figure 26. Connect each wire by inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and
then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 18 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note:
1.
Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch circuit neutral conductor.
Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the frame ground studs using installer-provided ring lugs and factory-supplied
mounting hardware. Recommended torque is 23 in-lbs.
Reinstalling Covers
1.
After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access
Covers on the back of the shelf. Secure with the previously removed screws.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[63]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 26. AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to a 588705000 List 3 (Three-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear
View
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear View
AC IN
Feed 2
(Rectifier
Modules
4-6)
(ØA)
TB2
ØA 1
TB1
1 ØA
(ØA)
(ØB)
ØB 2
2 ØB
(ØB)
ØC 3
3 ØC
(ØC)
FRAME GROUND CONNECTIONS
One 10-32 X 3/4" stud
and hardware per side
AC IN
Feed 1
(Rectifier
Modules
1-3)
(ØC)
FRAME GROUND CONNECTIONS
One 10-32 X 3/4" stud
and hardware per side
CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE SHELF
Mounting
Position
NOTE
Rectifier Module mounting
positions are numbered left
to right as viewed from front
of shelf.
2 (ØB)
Rect 1
L1
L2
Rect 2
L1
TB2, Terminal
1 (ØA)
2 (ØB)
Rect 4
L1
L2
Rect 5
L1
Rect 3
Rect 6
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
TB1, Terminal
1 (ØA)
[64]
3 (ØC)
3 (ØC)
L2
L1
L2
L2
L1
L2
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTIONS TO 582126000 LIST 46 (THREE-PHASE) TOP MOUNT AC INPUT TERMINATION PANEL
582126000 List 46 consists of a pre-wired, top-mount, AC input termination panel. The panel provides two (2) three-phase input circuits
for each of up to six (6) List 31 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves (12 three-phase feeds total per bay). Circular openings are provided in
the top of the panel for AC input and AC input grounding conductors. The openings accept 3/4" inch conduit fittings. It is recommended
that AC input wiring be provided to all Rectifier Module mounting positions, including currently unused positions. This wiring will ease
future installation of Rectifier Modules to meet increased load requirements.
Note:
A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 27 as these procedures are performed.
Note:
Wiring to Rectifier Module Mounting Positions 1-3 in each shelf are made in the left-hand side of the top access panel. Wiring to
Rectifier Module Mounting Positions 4-6 in each shelf are made in the right-hand side of the top access panel, as viewed from
the front of the system.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1.
Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the AC Input Termination Panel by first loosening the captive fastener that
secures each of them.
2.
Install conduit fittings as required in the top of the AC Input Termination Panel. Plug buttons are provided, and must be
installed in the openings not being used.
3.
Route wiring into the AC Input Termination Panel through the previously installed conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note:
1.
In each rack, Rectifier Module shelves are numbered 1-6 from top to bottom. In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting
positions are number 1-6 from left to right as viewed from the front.
Make AC input connections as shown in Figure 27. Connect each wire by inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and
then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 18 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note:
1.
Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch circuit neutral conductor.
Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the GND BAR terminal blocks provided. Connect each wire by inserting the
stripped end into the wire opening, and then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 23 in-lbs.
Reinstalling Covers
1.
After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access
Covers. Secure each by tightening the captive fasteners.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[65]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 27. AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to 582126000 List 46 (Three Phase) AC Input Termination Panel
Rear
Rectifier (PCU) Shelves are Number
from #1 to #6 from Top to Bottom
Cover
Removed
Cover
Removed
Rectifiers (PCUs) are numbered 1-6 from
left to right as viewed from the front.
GND
BAR
SHELF 3 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
ØA
SHELF 6 PCU4-6
ØC
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
ØB
ØA
SHELF 2 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
SHELF 1 PCU4-6
ØA
ØC
SHELF 5 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
GND
BAR
ØA
ØB
SHELF 1 PCU1-3
ØA
ØA
SHELF 4 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
ØB
SHELF 2 PCU1-3
ØC
ØA
SHELF 4 PCU1-3
ØA
ØA
[66]
ØB
ØC
ØB
SHELF 3 PCU1-3
ØC
ØA
SHELF 5 PCU1-3
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØB
ØC
SHELF 6 PCU1-3
ØA
ØB
ØC
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connections
Note:
For recommended wire size and alarm relay contact ratings, refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000. The SAG can be
accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
All external alarm, reference and control connections to the power system are made within the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
Note:
If List 80 LMS1000 Monitoring System is provided, refer to the separate LMS1000 Installation Manual for external alarm,
reference and control connections to the LMS1000.
If List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card is NOT Provided
Connect external alarm, reference, and control conductors to connector J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card P/N 534868 and to
terminal block TB1 on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532. Refer to Figure 28 for connector location and identification,
and Figure 29 and Figure 30A through Figure 30D for connector pinout information. A pre-assembled cable is provided for connections
to J8. One end connects to J8, the other end contains stripped leads suitable for splicing to customer wiring. The furnished cable is 15 ft.
long. A 60 ft. long cable is available. Refer to SAG582126000 for cable part numbers.
Note:
Remote Test/Equalize, Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart, and Rectifier Module Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm
Disconnect connections can be made to J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card or to TB1 located on Interconnect/LVD
Inhibit circuit card.
If List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card IS Provided
List 71 provides an Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card (P/N 524734) inside the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Make alarm
connections to terminal blocks J1 through J4 on this circuit card. Refer to Figure 28 for connector location and identification, and Figure
30A through Figure 30D for connector pinout information. Also make external reference and control connections to terminal block TB1
on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as described above.
To Access All External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections
1.
Open the front door of the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
After Completing All External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections
1.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
2.
Close the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[67]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 28. External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connector Location and Identification
JI
(Typical location on Modem or RS-485
crcuit card, Ethernet and RS-232/Modem
card slightly different configuration.)
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
J8
J4
J1
J2
J9 J10
J1
TB1
J13
J2
J3
ALARM TERMINATION/
AUDIBLE ALARM
CIRCUIT CARD, P/N 524734
(LIST 71 OPTION)
(MAIN BAY ONLY)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
J4
J8
MCA MAIN CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT CARD, P/N 534868
(MAIN BAY ONLY)
[68]
INTERCONNECT/
LVD INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD,
P/N 509532
(ALL BAYS)
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PROBE OR TXM (MULTIPLE PROBE CONCENTRATOR MODULE)
CONNECTION (IF REQUIRED)
Procedure
1.
If furnished, connect the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe or TXM (multiple probe concentrator
module) to connector J4 located on the MCA Main Controller circuit card in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure
28 for location of J4.
2.
If using a TXM module, complete the remaining electrical connections to the module per Section 5940. Section 5940 can be
found in the hardcopy Power System Installation Manual, and on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your
system.
CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL BLOCK TB1 ON INTERCONNECT/LVD INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD P/N 509532
Terminal block TB1 is located inside the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532. Refer to
Figure 28 for connector location, and Figure 29 for connector pinouts.
TB1 provides spring-clamp type terminals for customer connections. To connect wire, strip approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the
wire end. Fully insert the bare wire end into the rectangular opening in the terminal block. Gently tug on the wire to ensure that it
cannot be pulled out of the terminal block. (Wire may be removed from the terminal block by inserting a small flat-blade screwdriver
into the square cavity directly behind the wire, then depressing the screwdriver until the wire is released and can be pulled out of the
terminal block.)
Note:
A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Unless otherwise specified in these instructions, only make
connections to TB1 on the circuit card located in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet (the one connected to the MCA).
Procedure
1.
Note:
2.
Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 1 of TB1 places all Rectifier Modules into the
test/equalize mode of operation. Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of operation.
This connection can also be made to same terminal on any other Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to
this circuit card.
External System Voltage Meter Reading: If desired, extend external system voltage meter reading leads from the voltage
source to be read to terminals 2 (battery) and 3 (return) of TB1. This is the voltage source the MCA monitors for system alarms
and displays as "System Output Voltage".
Warning:
Equipment damage may result if leads are connected to the wrong terminals of TB1.
Note:
Ensure the Internal/External System Voltage Meter Reading circuit card on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is
in the EXT position, as previously described in "Setting Wiring Options".
Note:
System Voltage Meter Reading leads are factory connected to the cabinet's output busbars when Internal/External Voltage
System Voltage Meter Reading circuit card located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is in the INT position, as
previously described in "Setting Wiring Options".
Note:
This connection cannot be made to same terminals on any other Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to
this circuit card.
3.
External Voltage Sensing: If desired, extend external voltage sensing leads from the battery or other voltage sense location to
terminals 4 (positive) and 5 (negative) of TB1. The external voltage sensing leads should be fused at 1-1/3 amperes.
Warning:
Equipment damage may result if leads are connected to the wrong terminals of TB1.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[69]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Note:
Ensure the Internal/External Voltage Sensing circuit card located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is in the
EXT position, as previously described in "Setting Wiring Options".
Note:
External voltage sensing lead connections must be made to the SYSTEM side of any battery protective or disconnect devices
present.
Note:
Sense leads are factory connected to the cabinet's output busbars when Internal/External Voltage Sensing circuit card located
on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is in the INT position, as previously described in "Setting Wiring Options".
Note:
This connection cannot be made to same terminals on any other Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to
this circuit card.
4.
Note:
5.
Internally Fused Voltage Source for Connection to an LMS1000 Monitoring System: Terminal 7 of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD
Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is internally connected to 5 ampere fuse F7 located on the same circuit card. This fuse is
connected to system output. If desired, connect the input of an LMS1000 to this terminal. Terminal 6 of TB1 on the same
circuit card is provided for the return connection.
If List 80 is provided, leads from the List 80 LMS1000 are factory-connected to these terminals (Main Bay only).
Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 10 of TB1 inhibits all
Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch,
connect an external Form-C Emergency Stop switch to TB1 as follows: Connect the normally close contacts between TB1-8 and
TB1-9. Connect the normally open contacts between TB1-9 and TB1-10. Activating the switch inhibits all Rectifier Modules,
and disconnects the battery and system output from the controlled load(s).
Note:
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and an emergency stop switch is not required, for proper low voltage disconnect
operation, jumper TB1-8 to TB1-9.
Note:
Remove any jumpers from TB1-8, 9, and 10 on all other Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit cards that may be connected to this
circuit card.
Note:
This connection can also be made to same terminals on any other Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected
to this circuit card.
6.
Note:
7.
System Fuse Alarm Input: The system fuse alarm circuit activates when a ±18 to 60 volts DC signal is applied to terminal 11 of
TB1.
This connection can also be made to same terminal on any other Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to
this circuit card.
Terminal 12 is not used.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[70]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 29. External Reference and Control Connections to TB1
J8
J3
-48V
J1
J7
INT.
INTERCONNECT/LVD INHIBIT
CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532
J5 J6
J9
+24V
J10
J2
J4
EXT.
J12
TB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
+SNS
V OUT
RETURN
-SNS
V OUT
RETURN
REMOTE
TEST/EQ
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
EXTERNAL
SYSTEM
VOLTAGE
METER
READING
EXTERNAL INTERNALLY
FUSED
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
SENSING
SOURCE
EMERGENCY
SHUTDOWN
AND
FIRE ALARM
DISCONNECT
SYSTEM
FUSE
ALARM
INPUT
[71]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTIONS TO J8 ON MCA MAIN CONTROLLER CIRCUIT CARD P/N 534868
(IF LIST 71 AUDIBLE ALARM/ALARM TERMINATION CIRCUIT CARD IS NOT PROVIDED)
Connector J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card is a subminiature D-type connector. Refer to Figure 28 for connector location, and
Figure 30A through Figure 30D for connector pinouts.
A 15' color-coded pre-assembled cable is furnished (an optional 60 ft. cable is also available). Refer to SAG582126000 for cable part
numbers. This cable connects to J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card and provides leads that can be spliced to customer leads.
Splice these leads as described below. The color scheme for this cable is shown in Figure 30A through Figure 30D. This wire harness
cannot be used when List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card is connected to J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card.
MCA External Alarm Relay Contacts: The MCA provides 9 Form-C alarm relay contacts (available at J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit
card or J1-J4 on the optional List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card). The configuration of these alarm relays is determined
by the MCA Configuration Number set in your system. You can determine the MCA Configuration Number by the List Number of the
MCA (located on the Power System’s nameplate). You can also view your system's MCA Configuration Number after power-up by
following the MCA Menu Tree (Section 6022) (MCA Menu Tree Line Item "SPECNO#########" in the 'Inventory Menu').
Note:
Do not apply voltages higher than 42.4 volts AC (peak) or 60 volts DC to the MCA external alarm relay terminals.
If Equipped with List 10 MCA (Configuration Number 534876)
Refer to Figure 30A.
1.
Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the
internal high voltage shutdown and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2.
Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10
of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch,
use the terminals of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3.
Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of operation.
4.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 11 and 12 of J8.
6.
High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8.
7.
High Voltage Alarm 2 (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 14 and 15 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8.
8.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and
24 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8.
9.
50% Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 17
and 18 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8.
10. AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 20 and 21 of J8.
11. MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[72]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
12. Test/Equalize (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (locally or remotely), a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 35 and 36 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37 of J8.
13. System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[73]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 30A.
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is
Equipped with LIST 10 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534876) (if no List 71)
Alarm
or
Control
Test/
Equalize
2
(Relay K9)
MCA Audible
Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
2
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
2
(Relay K7)
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
J8
Pin
Violet/White
19
Blue/White
18
Green/White
17
Slate/Green
Orange/White
16
34
Slate/Red
Red/White
15
33
Lt. Blue/Green
Brown/White
14
32
Lt. Blue/Blue
Black/White
13
31
Lt. Blue/Red
Lt. Green
12
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
10
Remote Test/Equalize
28
Pink/Green
Slate
9
Rectifier Module
4
Emergency Shutdown
27
Pink/Blue
Violet
8
Remote HVSD
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
37
Blue/Black
36
Violet/Black
35
J8
ON
MCA
37
19
5.
High Voltage
Alarm 2
2
(Relay K4)
Minor Alarm
2
(Relay K2)
Pink/Red
Blue
7
(Not Used)
25
Pink/Black
Green
6
(Not Used)
24
Slate/Black
Yellow
5
(Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
Yellow/Black
Red
3
(Not Used)
21
Orange/Black
Brown
2
(Not Used)
20
Red/Black
Black
1
(Not Used)
20
1
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
2.
3.
4.
50% Battery
On Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K6)
26
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Notes:
1.
Alarm
or
Control
4
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located
within the Distribution Assembly.
Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire harness P/N
514380 (60 ft.).
Caution:
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or grounding of
unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage. Therefore, insulate all wire
ends not being used in your application.
[74]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
If Equipped with List 11 MCA (Configuration Number 534877)
Refer to Figure 30B.
1.
Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the
internal high voltage shutdown and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2.
Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10
of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch,
use the terminals of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3.
Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of operation.
4.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 11 and 12 of J8.
6.
High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8.
7.
Rectifier Module Fail Major Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 14
and 15 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8.
8.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and
24 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8.
9.
Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 17 and 18
of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8.
10. AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 20 and 21 of J8.
11. MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
12. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K9): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 35 and 36
of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37 of J8.
13. System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[75]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 30B.
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is
Equipped with LIST 11 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534877) (if no List 71)
Alarm
or
Control
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
2
(Relay K9)
MCA Audible
Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
2
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
2
(Relay K7)
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
J8
Pin
Violet/White
19
Blue/White
18
Green/White
17
Slate/Green
Orange/White
16
34
Slate/Red
Red/White
15
33
Lt. Blue/Green
Brown/White
14
32
Lt. Blue/Blue
Black/White
13
31
Lt. Blue/Red
Lt. Green
12
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
10
Remote Test/Equalize
28
Pink/Green
Slate
9
Rectifier Module
4
Emergency Shutdown
27
Pink/Blue
Violet
8
Remote HVSD
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
37
Blue/Black
36
Violet/Black
35
J8
ON
MCA
37
19
5.
Rectifier Module
Fail Major Alarm
2
(Relay K4)
Minor Alarm
2
(Relay K2)
Pink/Red
Blue
7
(Not Used)
25
Pink/Black
Green
6
(Not Used)
24
Slate/Black
Yellow
5
(Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
Yellow/Black
Red
3
(Not Used)
21
Orange/Black
Brown
2
(Not Used)
20
Red/Black
Black
1
(Not Used)
20
1
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
2.
3.
4.
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
2
(Relay K6)
26
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Notes:
1.
Alarm
or
Control
4
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located
within the Distribution Assembly.
Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire harness P/N
514380 (60 ft.).
Caution:
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or grounding of
unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage. Therefore, insulate all wire
ends not being used in your application.
[76]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
If Equipped with List 12 MCA (Configuration Number 534878)
Refer to Figure 30C.
1.
Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the
internal high voltage shutdown and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2.
Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10
of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch,
use the terminals of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3.
Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of operation.
4.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 11 and 12 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8.
6.
High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8.
7.
MCA Fail Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8, and
an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 14 and 15 of J8.
8.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 24 and
25 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and 24 of J8.
9.
Very Low Voltage Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of
J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 17 and 18 of J8.
10. AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 20 and 21 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8.
11. Fuse Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
12. Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K9): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37
of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 35 and 36 of J8.
13. System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[77]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 30C.
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is
Equipped with LIST 12 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534878) (if no List 71)
Alarm
or
Control
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
3
(Relay K9)
Fuse Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
3
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
3
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
3
(Relay K7)
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
J8
Pin
Violet/White
19
Blue/White
18
Green/White
17
Slate/Green
Orange/White
16
34
Slate/Red
Red/White
15
33
Lt. Blue/Green
Brown/White
14
32
Lt. Blue/Blue
Black/White
13
31
Lt. Blue/Red
Lt. Green
12
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
10
Remote Test/Equalize
28
Pink/Green
Slate
9
Rectifier Module
4
Emergency Shutdown
27
Pink/Blue
Violet
8
Remote HVSD
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
37
Blue/Black
36
Violet/Black
35
J8
ON
MCA
37
19
5.
MCA Fail Alarm
3
(Relay K4)
Minor Alarm
3
(Relay K2)
Pink/Red
Blue
7
(Not Used)
25
Pink/Black
Green
6
(Not Used)
24
Slate/Black
Yellow
5
(Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
Yellow/Black
Red
3
(Not Used)
21
Orange/Black
Brown
2
(Not Used)
20
Red/Black
Black
1
(Not Used)
20
1
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
2.
3.
4.
Very Low
Voltage Alarm
3
(Relay K6)
26
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Notes:
1.
Alarm
or
Control
4
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located
within the Distribution Assembly.
Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire harness P/N
514380 (60 ft.).
Caution:
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or grounding of
unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage. Therefore, insulate all wire
ends not being used in your application.
[78]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
If Equipped with List 13 MCA (Configuration Number 534879)
Refer to Figure 30D.
1.
Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the
internal high voltage shutdown and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2.
Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10
of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch,
use the terminals of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3.
Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal 10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of operation.
4.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 11 and 12 of J8.
6.
Test/Equalize Mode 2 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8.
7.
Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 14 and 15
of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8.
8.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and
24 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8.
9.
AC Fail Major Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 17 and 18 of J8,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8.
10. AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 20 and 21 of J8.
11. LVD Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
12. Test/Equalize Mode 1 (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (locally or remotely), a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 35 and 36 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37 of J8.
13. System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[79]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 30D. External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is
Equipped with LIST 13 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534879) (if no List 71)
Alarm
or
Control
Test/Equalize
Mode 1
2
(Relay K9)
LVD Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
Test/Equalize
Mode 2
2
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
2
(Relay K7)
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
J8
Pin
Violet/White
19
Blue/White
18
Green/White
17
Slate/Green
Orange/White
16
34
Slate/Red
Red/White
15
33
Lt. Blue/Green
Brown/White
14
32
Lt. Blue/Blue
Black/White
13
31
Lt. Blue/Red
Lt. Green
12
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
10
Remote Test/Equalize
28
Pink/Green
Slate
9
Rectifier Module
4
Emergency Shutdown
27
Pink/Blue
Violet
8
Remote HVSD
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
5
Wire Colors
37
Blue/Black
36
Violet/Black
35
J8
ON
MCA
37
19
5.
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
2
(Relay K4)
Minor Alarm
2
(Relay K2)
Pink/Red
Blue
7
(Not Used)
25
Pink/Black
Green
6
(Not Used)
24
Slate/Black
Yellow
5
(Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
Yellow/Black
Red
3
(Not Used)
21
Orange/Black
Brown
2
(Not Used)
20
Red/Black
Black
1
(Not Used)
20
1
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
2.
3.
4.
AC Fail
Major Alarm
2
(Relay K6)
26
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Notes:
1.
Alarm
or
Control
4
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located
within the Distribution Assembly.
Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire harness P/N
514380 (60 ft.).
Caution:
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or grounding of
unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage. Therefore, insulate all wire
ends not being used in your application.
[80]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL BLOCKS J1-J4 ON AUDIBLE ALARM / ALARM TERMINATION CIRCUIT CARD P/N 524734 (LIST 71 ONLY)
Terminal blocks J1-J4 on the Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination circuit card provide spring-clamp type terminals for customer
connections. Refer to Figure 28 for terminal block location, and Figure 31 for connector pinouts.
To Make Wiring Connection: To connect wire, strip approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the wire end. Fully insert the bare wire end
into the rectangular opening in the terminal block. Gently tug on the wire to ensure that it cannot be pulled out of the terminal block.
(Wire may be removed from the terminal block by inserting a small flat-blade screwdriver into the square cavity directly behind the wire,
then depressing the screwdriver until the wire is released and can be pulled out of the terminal block.)
MCA External Alarm Relay Contacts: The MCA provides 9 Form-C alarm relay contacts (available at J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit
card or J1-J4 on the optional List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card). The configuration of these alarm relays is determined
by the MCA Configuration Number set in your system. You can determine the MCA Configuration Number by the List Number of the
MCA (located on the Power System’s nameplate). You can also view your system's MCA Configuration Number after power-up by
following the MCA Menu Tree (Section 6022) (MCA Menu Tree Line Item "SPECNO#########" in the 'Inventory Menu').
Note:
Do not apply voltages higher than 42.4 volts AC (peak) or 60 volts DC to the external alarm relay terminals.
If Equipped with List 10 MCA (Configuration Number 534876)
Refer to Figure 31A.
1.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J3.
3.
High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2.
4.
High Voltage Alarm 2 (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J3,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3.
5.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of
J2, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2.
6.
50% Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3
and 4 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3.
7.
AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J2.
8.
MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1, and
an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J1.
Note:
9.
External audible alarm connections are inoperative if Local/Remote option jumpers on the List 71 circuit card are set for Local
alarm operation. See "Setting Wiring Options” for an adjustment procedure.
Test/Equalize (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J1.
10. Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11. Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[81]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 31A.
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card when Power System is Equipped with LIST 10
MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534876)
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Test/
Equalize
2
(Relay K9)
MCA Audible Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
(Not Used)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
2
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
2
(Relay K7)
J2
J10 J11
1
Of
Alarm
1
50% Battery
On Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K6)
3
4
6
High Voltage
Alarm 2
2
(Relay K4)
J1
7
8
Minor Alarm
2
(Relay K2)
9
10
1
Converter Minor
2, 4
Alarm
2
3
4
5
6
Term.
(Not Used)
2
5
10
Converter Major
2, 4
Alarm
J2
7
Of
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
J4
7
8
(Not Used)
9
10
8
9
10
Notes:
1.
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[82]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
If Equipped with List 11 MCA (Configuration Number 534877)
Refer to Figure 31B.
1.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J3.
3.
High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2.
4.
Rectifier Module Fail Major Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6
and 7 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3.
5.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of
J2, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2.
6.
Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of
J3, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3.
7.
AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J2.
8.
MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1, and
an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J1.
Note:
9.
External audible alarm connections are inoperative if Local/Remote option jumpers on the List 71 circuit card are set for Local
alarm operation. See "Setting Wiring Options” for an adjustment procedure.
Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J1.
10. Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11. Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[83]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 31B.
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card when Power System is Equipped with LIST 11
MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534877)
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
2
(Relay K9)
MCA Audible Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
(Not Used)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
2
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
2
(Relay K7)
J2
J10 J11
1
Of
Alarm
1
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
2
(Relay K6)
3
4
6
Rectifier Module
Fail Major Alarm
2
(Relay K4)
J1
7
8
Minor Alarm
2
(Relay K2)
9
10
1
Converter Minor
2, 4
Alarm
2
3
4
5
6
Term.
(Not Used)
2
5
10
Converter Major
2, 4
Alarm
J2
7
Of
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
J4
7
8
(Not Used)
9
10
8
9
10
Notes:
1.
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[84]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
If Equipped with List 12 MCA (Configuration Number 534878)
Refer to Figure 31C.
1.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J3, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3.
3.
High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2.
4.
MCA Fail Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J3.
5.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of
J2, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J2.
6.
Very Low Voltage Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J3.
7.
AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J2, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2.
8.
Fuse Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1, and an open
loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J1.
9.
Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J1.
10. Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11. Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[85]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 31C.
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card when Power System is Equipped with LIST 12
MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534878)
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
3
(Relay K9)
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
(Not Used)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
3
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
3
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
3
(Relay K7)
J2
J10 J11
1
Of
Alarm
1
Very Low
Voltage Alarm
3
(Relay K6)
3
4
6
J1
MCA Fail Alarm
3
(Relay K4)
7
8
Minor Alarm
3
(Relay K2)
9
10
1
Converter Minor
2, 4
Alarm
2
3
4
5
6
Term.
(Not Used)
2
5
10
Converter Major
2, 4
Alarm
J2
7
Of
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
J4
7
8
(Not Used)
9
10
8
9
10
Notes:
1.
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[86]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
If Equipped with List 13 MCA (Configuration Number 534879)
Refer to Figure 31D.
1.
Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2.
Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J3.
3.
Test/Equalize Mode 2 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2,
and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2.
4.
Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of
J3, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3.
5.
Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of
J2, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2.
6.
AC Fail Major Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J3, and
an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3.
7.
AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J2.
8.
LVD Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J1, and an open
loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1.
9.
Test/Equalize Mode 1 (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop circuit
is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J1.
10. Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11. Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an
open loop circuit is provided between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[87]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 31D. External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card when Power System is Equipped with LIST 13
MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534879)
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Test/Equalize
Mode 1
2
(Relay K9)
LVD Alarm
3
(Relay K8)
Major Alarm
3
(Relay K1)
(Not Used)
Test/Equalize
Mode 2
2
(Relay K3)
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
2
(Relay K5)
AC Fail
Alarm
2
(Relay K7)
J2
J10 J11
1
Of
Alarm
1
AC Fail
Major Alarm
2
(Relay K6)
3
4
6
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
2
(Relay K4)
J1
7
8
Minor Alarm
2
(Relay K2)
9
10
1
Converter Minor
2, 4
Alarm
2
3
4
5
6
Term.
(Not Used)
2
5
10
Converter Major
2, 4
Alarm
J2
7
Of
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
J4
7
8
(Not Used)
9
10
8
9
10
Notes:
1.
“Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are shown deenergized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[88]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
BATTERY DISCONNECT EXTERNAL ALARM CONNECTIONS TO LIST RB, RC, RD, OR RE (IF FURNISHED)
When the power system is equipped with List RB, RC, RD, or RE; one set of Form-C contacts is provided to control a customer-furnished
external alarm. The contacts are rated for 5A at 28VDC. Connections are made via a 3-pin locking-type connector (P2) located within the
Distribution Cabinet (top left corner directly in front of the battery disconnect unit). A 10-ft. long mating wire harness suitable for
splicing to customer alarm circuits is furnished. Refer to Figure 32 for the color code.
Alarm contacts operate as follows. When the contactor is energized (pulled in), contacts open between pins 1 and 2 of connector P2, and
contacts close between pins 2 and 3 of P2. When the contactor is deenergized (released), contacts close between pins 1 and 2 of
connector P2, and contacts open between pins 2 and 3 of P2.
Figure 32. Battery Disconnect Alarm Connections (List RB, RC, RD, RE)
ALARM CONTACTS
Contactor shown
in deenergized
(released) state.
CONNECTOR P2
(NEAR SWITCH)
BLUE
VIOLET
SLATE
1
1
BLUE
2
2
VIOLET
3
3
SLATE
FURNISHED 10 FT. HARNESS
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[89]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
LOAD SHUNT CONNECTIONS (SHUNTED GJ/218 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND/OR LIST AJ AND CJ DISTRIBUTION BUS PANELS) (IF
FURNISHED)
The Power System may include distribution options that provide individual load metering shunts. These include GJ/218 circuit breakers
that are equipped with shunts, and List AJ and CJ Distribution Bus Panels which also provide shunts. In all cases, the shunt leads are
labeled for identification. The labels indicate the bay (BAY 1 or BAY 2) and the mounting order of the GJ circuit breakers and/or TPH fuse
holders in the Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 33A and Figure 33B for examples. Note that numbering is from left to right or bottom
to top in each row, and starts with the bottom row in the cabinet. Unoccupied mounting positions are not counted. GJ/218 circuit
breakers NOT equipped with shunts also are not counted. The leads are color-coded: red for positive (+) and black for negative (-).
Unless otherwise specified, the shunt leads exit the Distribution Cabinet at the rear of the bottom panel. Lead length from this exit point
ranges from approximately 7 to 10 feet. The leads are 22 AWG stranded wire in twisted pairs. Refer to System Application Guide
SAG582126000 for shunt ratings.
Connecting Shunt Leads to the LMS1000 Monitoring System (List 80)
If the Power System is equipped with the LMS1000 Monitoring System (List 80), shunt leads in the Main Bay are factory-connected to one
or more Four (4) Input or Eight (8) Input Analog Circuit Cards in the LMS1000. The leads are connected as shown in Figure 33C or Figure
33D. If Supplemental Bays are provided, the installer must connect the Supplemental Bay shunt leads to additional Analog Circuit Cards
in the LMS1000 as required. Follow the pattern shown in Figure 33C or Figure 33D when making these connections. Refer to the
separate LMS1000 documentation for complete installation and configuration details.
Note:
The shunts used in the shunted GJ/218-type circuit breakers provide 25mV at full rated load. To correctly read these shunts, the
LMS1000 must be programmed as follows: If using four-input analog cards (P/N 506336), set jumper J2, J102, J202, and J302 on
each card to read 50mV and 100mV DC shunt inputs. (If using the eight (8) input analog circuit card, P/N 514528, this
adjustment is not required.) Then program the LMS1000 to read a 50mV shunt at TWICE the actual full load rating of the shunt.
For example, for a 100-amp circuit breaker with 25 mV shunt, set the LMS1000 to read 50 mV at 200 amperes. Refer to the
separate LMS1000 documentation for complete installation and configuration details.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[90]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 33A.
Distribution Option Example Showing Circuit Breaker Shunt Lead Numbering Scheme (Numbers shown on circuit breakers do not
appear on actual device.)
ROW D
(LOAD D)
FEED
LOAD D
LIST
CF
9
10 11
LOAD C
12
13
14 15
16
ROW C
(LOAD C)
FEED
ROW B
(LOAD B)
FEED
LOAD B
LIST
CE
1
2
3
LOAD A
4
5
6
7
8
ROW A
(LOAD A)
FEED
PARTIAL FRONT VIEW OF
4-ROW CABINET IN
MAIN BAY
(ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE EQUIPPED WITH SHUNTS)
EXAMPLE: SHUNT LEADS FROM THIS
CIRCUIT BREAKER ARE LABELED "BAY 1 #4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[91]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 33B.
Distribution Option Example Showing Circuit Breaker Shunt Lead Numbering Scheme (Numbers shown on circuit breakers do not
appear on actual device.)
EXAMPLE: SHUNT LEADS FROM THIS CIRCUIT BREAKER
ARE LABELED "BAY 2 #8".
ROW D
(LOAD D)
FEED
LOAD
D
LIST
CD
8
7
6
ROW C
(LOAD C)
FEED
LOAD B
LOAD C
LIST
CF
1
2
3
4
5
ROW A
(LOAD A)
FEED
LIST
CA
THIS CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOT EQUIPPED WITH SHUNT.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
ROW B
(LOAD B)
FEED
PARTIAL FRONT VIEW OF
4-ROW CABINET IN
SUPPLEMENTAL BAY
[92]
NOTE: No shunt leads are
present on List CA. Therefore,
there are no "Load A" circuit
breaker shunt leads in this
cabinet.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 33C.
Typical Shunt Lead Connections to a Four Input Analog Circuit Card in the LMS1000
Place jumper
on pin 1 ONLY.
16
15
3 2 1
J2
RED
13
BLACK
11
J102
J202
TB1
7
3 2 1
BLACK
RED
5
BLACK
4
BAY 1 #3
Do not use.
6
3
506336
RED
9
8
BAY 1 #4
Do not use.
10
3 2 1
J302
14
12
3 2 1
Do not use.
BAY 1 #2
Do not use.
2
RED
1
BLACK
BAY 1 #1
NOTE: LEADS FROM FIRST FOUR SHUNTS SHOWN.
REPEAT PATTERN AS REQUIRED ON ADDITIONAL
CARDS FOR ALL REMAINING SHUNT LEADS.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[93]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 33D.
Typical Shunt Lead Connections to an Eight Input Analog Circuit Card in the LMS1000
-
BLACK
15
+
RED
14
-
BLACK
+
-
RED
11
+
RED
10
-
BLACK
+
-
RED
7
+
RED
6
-
BLACK
+
-
RED
3
+
RED
2
-
BLACK
+
RED
16
13
12
TB1
9
8
5
4
514528
1
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BAY 1 #8
BAY 1 #7
BAY 1 #6
BAY 1 #5
BAY 1 #4
BAY 1 #3
BAY 1 #2
BAY 1 #1
NOTE: LEADS FROM FIRST EIGHT SHUNTS SHOWN.
REPEAT PATTERN AS REQUIRED ON ADDITIONAL
CARDS FOR ALL REMAINING SHUNT LEADS.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[94]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Connections
Refer to Figure 34 for an interbay and bay-to-bay cable diagram.
Figure 34. Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Diagram
Interconnect/
LVD Inhibit
Circuit Card
P/N 509532
Rectifier Shelf
Cable
Interface Circuit Card
P/N 509071
P/N 535250
Pigtail
Interconnect/
LVD Inhibit
Circuit Card
P/N 509532
Rectifier Shelf
Cable
Interface Circuit Card
P/N 509071
P/N 535250
Cable
P/N 514334
or 100916
External Alarm Cable
P/N 514327 Connects Here
(if List 71 not installed)
on MCA Main Controller
Circuit Card P/N 534868
Pigtail
RS-485 MCA
Interface Circuit Card
(if List 80 installed)
Cable
P/N 514335
or 100575
Distribution Cabinet
(inside view)
Cable
P/N 529120
Distribution Cabinet
(inside view)
Cable P/N 500819
from RS-485 Circuit Card
to LMS1000 (if installed)
Cable
P/N 514608
Connect Cable P/N 529120 between
pigtail on Circuit Card P/N 535250 and
connector coming out of top of Rectifier Shelf.
Optional LMS1000 Monitoring System
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Supplemental Bay
Main Bay
Note 1: P/O Rectifier Shelf internal wire harness.
Mating connectors provided so that harness
exiting bottom of one cabinet plugs into harness
exiting top of cabinet installed beneath it.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[95]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
FACTORY CONNECTED INTERBAY CABLES
Bay's Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card to MCA Interconnect Cable (MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal)
Note:
This cable is factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the connection.
A cable (P/N 509071) is factory connected between the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card P/N 535250 located in the Bay's Distribution
Cabinet and the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located in the same Distribution Cabinet, as shown in Figure 35.
Bay's Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card to Top-Most Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf Interconnect Cable (MCA Rectifier Module
Control Signal)
Note:
This cable is factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the connection.
A cable (P/N 529120) is factory connected between the pigtail located on Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card P/N 535250 located in the
Bay's Distribution Cabinet and the connector exiting the top of the top most installed Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf located in the
same Distribution Cabinet, as shown in Figure 35.
Bay's Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf to Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf Interconnect Cable (MCA Rectifier Module Control
Signal)
Note:
This cable is factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the connection.
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves located within the same bay are interconnected via the shelf's internal wiring harness. A connector
exits the top and bottom of each Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf. The cable exiting the bottom of one Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
is connected to the mating connector exiting the top of the shelf installed below it.
MCA to LMS1000 Interface Cable and LMS1000 Input Power Cable (Main Bay Only)
Note:
These cables are factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the connections or to make the connections in a field
installed LMS1000.
•
A cable (P/N 500819) is factory connected between the RS 485 circuit card installed on the MCA located within the Main Bay
Distribution Cabinet and the OEM3 jack labeled "Vortex RS485" located on back of the LMS1000 shelf.
•
A cable (P/N 514608) is factory connected between the input power connector located on back of the LMS1000 shelf and the
"Internally Fused Voltage Source" terminals located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card 509532 located within the Main Bay
Distribution Cabinet.
Field Installed LMS1000 Cable Connection Procedure:
Note:
Refer to Figure 35 and Figure 36.
1.
Open the front door of the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3.
Connect one end of the furnished cable (P/N 500819) to the connector labeled 'Vortex RS485' located on the back of the
LMS1000 shelf. Route the cable up into the Distribution Cabinet and UNDER the bracket shown in Figure 36. Connect the
remaining end of the cable to connector J1 on the RS-485 Interface circuit card.
4.
Form all harness wires for best fit, bundling and securing as required with furnished plastic cable ties.
5.
Refer to Figure 36 and connect cable P/N 514608 to terminal block TB1 located on the back of the LMS1000 as follows:
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[96]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
•
Connect the RED wire to the terminal labeled “–”.
•
Connect the BLACK wire to the terminal labeled “+“.
6.
From the back of the LMS1000 route the cable up into the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet, along the right-hand side (front view)
to the vicinity of terminal block TB1on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card. Refer to Figure 36.
7.
Connect the cable to terminal block TB1on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card as follows:
•
Connect the RED wire to terminal 7.
•
Connect the BLACK wire to terminal 6.
8.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
9.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[97]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 35. Connections on Back of LMS1000
LMS1000
REAR VIEW
PLUG CABLE FROM MCA RS-485
INTERFACE CIRCUIT CARD HERE
TERMINAL BLOCK TB1.
CONNECT LMS BATTERY
INPUT JUMPERS
(P/N 514608) HERE.
BLACK
RED
VORTEX RS-485
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[98]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 36. LMS1000 Connections to Main Bay Distribution Cabinet
J1
PLUG CABLE FROM
LMS1000 RS-485 PORT HERE
RS-485 INTERFACE
CIRCUIT CARD (P/O LIST 80)
P/N 514608 CABLE
FROM LMS1000
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF DISTRIBUTION CABINET
ROUTE CABLE FROM LMS1000
RS-485 PORT UNDER THIS BRACKET.
LMS BATTERY
INPUT JUMPERS
P/N 514608
1
12
TB1
CONNECT BLACK TO TERMINAL 6
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
CONNECT RED TO TERMINAL 7
[99]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CUSTOMER CONNECTED BAY-TO-BAY CABLES
Bay-to-Bay 'MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal' Interconnect Cable
Note:
Applies only if power system includes a supplemental bay that contains Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves. If the supplemental
bay is “distribution only” (List 4 option), these connections are not required.
Procedure:
Note:
Refer to Figure 37.
1.
For each bay in the power system, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in
the counterclockwise position.
2.
For each bay in the power system, remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To
do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear
the keyhole slots in the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3.
Connect one end of the supplied interconnecting cable to any unoccupied connector J8, J9, or J10 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit
circuit card P/N 509532 located within the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Connect the remaining cable end to any unoccupied
connector J8, J9, or J10 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located within the Supplemental Bay Distribution
Cabinet. Route this cable through the opening provided in the back of each Distribution Cabinet.
•
Cable P/N 514335 is provided with List 2 (7.5' cable).
•
Cable P/N 100575 is provided with List 5 (25' cable).
4.
If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet.
To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the
cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
5.
If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be
shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[100]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 37. 'MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal' Cable Connections Between Bays
CONNECTION POINTS SHOWN
ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. CONNECT
TO ANY UNOCCUPIED J8, J9, OR
J10 ON EACH CIRCUIT CARD.
CABLE
PART NO. 514335 (7-1/2 FT.)
OR
PART NO. 100575 (25 FT.)
J13
J8
J3
-48V
INT.
J5 J6
J1
J7
+24V
J9
J13
J10
J2
-48V
J4
J5 J6
EXT.
J1
J7
INT.
J12
+24V
J9
J10
J2
J4
EXT.
J12
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
MAIN BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
SUPPLEMENTAL BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
J8
J3
[101]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Bay-to-Bay 'MCA Distribution Control Signal' Interconnect Cable
Note:
Applies only if power system includes more than one bay.
Procedure:
Note:
Refer to Figure 38.
1.
For each bay in the power system, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in
the counterclockwise position.
2.
For each bay in the power system, remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To
do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear
the keyhole slots in the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3.
Connect one end of the supplied interconnecting cable to connector J1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
located within the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Connect the remaining cable end to connector J2 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit
circuit card P/N 509532 located within the Supplemental Bay Distribution Cabinet. Route this cable through the opening
provided in the back of each Distribution Cabinet.
•
Cable P/N 514334 is provided with List 2 (6' cable).
•
Cable P/N 100916 is provided with List 5 (25' cable).
Note:
Connector J2 on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card in the Main Bay is not used.
Note:
If an optional Lorain® Model LBD800 or LBD2000 Battery Disconnect Panel will be connected to the MCA of this system (to
connector J1 on Part No. 509532 Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card), the connection will be made to either the main bay
(single bay system) or the last supplemental bay (multiple bay system). Refer to the Model LBD800 or LBD2000 instruction
manual for details.
4.
If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet.
To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the
cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
5.
If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be
shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[102]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 38. 'MCA Distribution Control Signal' Cable Connections Between Bays
CABLE
PART NO 514334 (6 FT.)
OR
PART NO. 100916 (25 FT.)
J13
J13
J8
J3
-48V
INT.
J5 J6
J1
J7
+24V
J10
J9
J2
-48V
J4
J5 J6
EXT.
J1
J7
INT.
+24V
J9
J10
J2
J4
EXT.
J12
J12
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
MAIN BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
SUPPLEMENTAL BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
J8
J3
[103]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Connections to List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves
Note:
If List 63 or 64 are not provided, skip this procedure.
Note:
If the power system was ordered in a relay rack, this procedure has been performed at the factory.
CONNECTING LIST 63 AND 64 CONVERTER SHELVES ALARM CABLE HARNESS
Procedure
1.
Locate Alarm Cable Harness P/N 524807 furnished with List 63.
2.
Locate the 9-pin subsystem alarm connector at the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet. If not already done, bring this
connector out through the opening at the rear of the cabinet bottom panel.
3.
Connect the Alarm Cable Harness between the Distribution Cabinet Alarm Connector and the Alarm Connectors located on the
List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves, as shown in Figure 39. The harness must enter the Converter Shelves through the opening
shown in Figure 39.
CONNECTING LIST 63 AND 64 CONVERTER SHELF OUTPUT CABLES
Procedure
1.
Locate Output Cables in kit P/N 528874. One kit is provided with List 63 and one with List 64. Each kit consists of two (2)
Output Cables labeled /+/.
2.
Open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
3.
Loosen (2) screws holding the plastic shield over the circuit breakers or fuseholders, slide shield upwards and remove.
4.
Connect one end of the Output Cables to the associated Distribution Bus Module subsystem input terminals as shown in Figure
40. Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to lug mating surfaces before connecting. Torque as specified in Figure 40.
5.
Route the Output Cables installed in the previous step over the top of the Distribution Bus Module, towards the rear of the
cabinet, and down through the opening in the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet.
6.
Install the shield removed in a previous step. To do so, position the shield and slide downwards on screws. Tighten screws.
7.
Close the front door of the Distribution Cabinet.
8.
Remove the rear cover from each Converter Shelf by first loosening the screws that secure it.
9.
Route the Output Cables previously connected to the Distribution Cabinet into the Converter Shelves through the opening
shown in Figure 39. Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to lug mating surfaces before connecting. Torque as specified in
the Figure 39.
10. Reinstall the Converter Shelves rear covers.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[104]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 39. Connecting Converter Shelves Alarm Cable Harness and Output Cables
OUTPUT CABLES
FURNISHED IN KIT P/N 528824
OUTPUT CABLES
FURNISHED IN KIT P/N 528824
To Subsystem Distribution
Bus Modules installed
in Distribution Cabinet.
To Subsystem Distribution
Bus Modules installed
in Distribution Cabinet.
ALARM CABLE HARNESS P/N 524807
To alarm connector at
bottom of Distribution Cabinet.
List 63 Converter Shelf
Alarm Connector for List 64.
Tie back if no List 64.
List 64 Converter Shelf
Alarm Connector Location
Alarm Cable and Output
Cables Enter Shelf Here.
Connect output cables here.
Torque to 84 in-lbs.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[105]
List 63/64 Converter Shelf
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 40. Connecting Converter Shelf Output Cables to Associated Distribution Bus Module
GROUND
BUSBAR
CONNECT LIST 63 OR 64
OUTPUT CABLES
(LABELED /+/) HERE.
USING EXISTING HARDWARE.
TORQUE TO 84 IN-LBS.
LIST KA SHOWN, OTHER LISTS SIMILAR
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[106]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbars (List 2 Only)
When List 2 is ordered, Bay-to-Bay Busbars and hardware are provided for system power connections between Distribution Cabinets.
Interconnect per Figure 41.
Figure 41. Installing Bay-to Bay Busbars (List 2 Only) (cont’d on next page)
Note: Upper and lower busbars are similar,
but not identical. When correctly installed,
lower busbar projects farther out from rear
of cabinet than upper busbar.
3/8-16 x 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
(3) per Busbar
Torque to 180 inch pounds.
Part No. 509677
Z-Shaped Busbar
Part of List 2
Install (1) per Bay.
3/8-16 x 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
(3) per Busbar
Torque to 180 inch pounds.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[107]
Part No. 513749
Z-Shaped Busbar
Part of List 2
Install (1) per Bay.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 41. Installing Interbay Busbars (List 2 Only) (cont’d from previous page)
ORIENT BUSBARS AS SHOWN.
SEE DETAIL A FOR ASSEMBLY ORDER.
GND
BUS
BAT
BUS
DETAIL A
ASSEMBLY ORDER
(GND BUS SHOWN; BAT BUS SIMILAR)
Z-Shaped Busbar
(Previously Installed)
Part No. 509681
Nut Plate
Part No. 509685 Flat Interbay
Busbar (with Captive Nuts)
Part No. 509686 Flat
Interbay Busbar
3/8" Flat Washer
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
3/8-16 x 1-3/4" Bolt
Torque to 180 inch pounds
[108]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Cable Connection(s) to the MCA Interface Option
RS-485 MCA INTERFACE OPTION CONNECTION
(LIST 80 ONLY)
When the RS-485 MCA Interface Option is installed, a SMART Monitoring System is connected to the RJ-45 connector located on the
RS-485 circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet, as detailed in the previous procedure "Field Installed LMS1000 Cable
Connection Procedure".
With the RS-485 MCA Interface Option installed, maximum cable length is 4000 feet.
MODEM MCA INTERFACE OPTION CONNECTION
(LISTS 72 AND 74 ONLY)
When the Modem or RS-232/Modem MCA Interface Option is installed, the remote access phone line is connected to the RJ-11 jack (J1,
Modem) located on the Modem or RS-232/Modem circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 42 for
location.
The MCA can be accessed using WinLink installed on a remote PC.
Procedure
1.
Open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3.
Connect a cable from the RJ-11 connector (J1, Modem) located on the Modem circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution
Cabinet to a phone line dedicated to this MCA.
4.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
5.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[109]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 42. MCA Interface Option Connector Locations and Identification
JI
(Typical location on Modem or RS-485
crcuit card, Ethernet and RS-232/Modem
card slightly different configuration.)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
[110]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
RS-232 MCA INTERFACE OPTION CONNECTION (LIST 74 ONLY)
When the RS-232/Modem MCA Interface Option is installed, a remote access PC can be connected to the 9-pin female D-Type connector
located on the front of the Main Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 43 and Table 6 for connector pin-outs.
With the RS-232/Modem MCA Interface Option installed, maximum recommended cable length is 100 feet.
The MCA can be accessed using WinLink installed on the remote PC.
Procedure
1.
Connect a cable from the 9-pin female D-Type connector, located at the right hand side of the Main Distribution Cabinet front
panel, to a PC running WinLink.
Figure 43. Front Panel RS-232 Port (if furnished)
5
1
9 6
Table 6.
Front Panel RS-232 Port Pinouts (if furnished)
RS-232 Port
Pin
*
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Application
1
--
2
Transmitted Data (TxD)
3
Received Data (RxD)
4
Data Set Ready (/DSR)
5
Signal Ground (GND)
6
Data Terminal Ready (/DTR)
7
Clear to Send (/CTS)*
8
Request to Send (/RTS)*
9
--
Hardware Handshake Signal
(when RTS/CTS Hardware
Handshake Enabled)
[111]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
ETHERNET MCA INTERFACE OPTION CONNECTION (LISTS 75-78 ONLY)
Perform the procedure under Setting Up the MCA Ethernet Option in “INITIALLY STARTING THE SYSTEM” to program the IP parameters into
the MCA Ethernet card. If you installed an MCA Ethernet card that supports SNMP, you will also set the SNMP parameters when you
perform the procedure.
The MCA is connected to the customer's network running TCP/IP via the RJ-45 10BaseT jack located on the MCA Ethernet circuit card
installed in the Main Distribution Cabinet, labeled "J1, Ethernet". Refer to Figure 42 for location. Jack pin configuration is a standard
Ethernet scheme, twisted pair.
Note:
Use shielded Ethernet cable (grounded at both ends). Note that the MCA RJ-45 jack is connected to chassis ground.
Note that a Front Access Ethernet Connector Kit P/N 525110 may be installed, allowing you to make the Ethernet cable connection at the
front of the MCA Panel.
The MCA can be accessed via a Web-Browser from the PC or via Modbus® TCP. An Ethernet Interface option is also available that adds
SNMP support and Battery Monitoring.
Procedure
1.
Open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2.
Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover.
Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3.
Connect a network cable to the Ethernet connector (J1, Ethernet) located on the Ethernet circuit card in the Main Bay
Distribution Cabinet.
4.
Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on its two mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two screws.
5.
Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the captive fastener.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[112]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Load Connections to Distribution Cabinet(s)
Note:
Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for recommended wire sizes and crimp lugs. Refer also to the SAG for
maximum size of wire to connect to the various lug landing points. Refer to drawing 031110100 for lug crimping information.
Refer to drawings 031110200 and 031110300 for additional lug information. The SAG and Engineering Drawings can be
accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system. A copy of drawings 031110100,
031110200, and 031110300 are also located in the hardcopy INSTALLATION MANUAL for your convenience.
Refer to the following table for supplemental lug crimping information when using the special application crimp lug / strap
combination.
SUPPLEMENTAL LUG CRIMPING INFORMATION
1
Crimp Lug Part No.
Color Key
Die Index/
Code No.
Die Cat.
Number
PINK
42H
15508
245393500
Burndy: YA25L-4TCG1
245393600
Burndy: YA26L-4TCG1
BLACK
45
15526
245393700
Burndy: YA27L-4TCG1
ORANGE
50
15530
245393800
Burndy: YA28L-4TCG1
PURPLE
54H
15511
YELLOW
62
15510
RED
71
15514
514872
514873
1
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
Crimp Tool Required , T&B Model
TBM12 or TBM15 Hydraulic Heads
T & B: 256-30695-1879
Burndy: YA29L-4TCG1
T & B: 256-30695-1880
Burndy: YA31L-4TCG1
The lugs should be crimped to the specifications given in the manufacturer’s
instructions furnished with the crimp tool or lug.
[113]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLIES WIRING ILLUSTRATIONS
Table 7 cross-references the List Number of the available Distribution Assemblies with the wiring illustrations provided in this section.
Table 7.
Distribution Bus Assembly Wiring Illustrations
List No.
See
Figure 44
List No.
See
Figure 44
P/N 509128
A
JB
N
O
AA, AN
B
JC
AB, AC, CB, CD
C
JD
P
AD, AE
D
KA
Q
AG, AH, AJ,
CG, CJ, AP
E
LB
R
AK, AL
F
LC
S
AM
G
NA
T
BA
H
NB
U
CA
I
NC
V
CE, CF
J
ND
W
EA
K
RA, RB
X
GB
L
RC, RD, RE
Y
JA
M
TA, TB
Z
CONNECTING LOADS TO DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLIES EQUIPPED WITH BULLET NOSE TYPE DISTRIBUTION DEVICES (TPS/TLS FUSES
AND/OR BULLET NOSE-TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKERS)
Lug-terminated load leads are connected to the individual load busbars located on the Distribution Bus Module and the respective
distribution ground busbar. To access these, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener
in the counterclockwise position.
•
The individual load busbars provide 1/4-20 threaded holes or studs for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that
have 5/8 inch centers and 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
•
The distribution ground busbar provides 1/4-20 studs for installation of the same type of customer-provided lugs. Customer
must provide lug mounting hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended torque. Maximum size
of wire to be connected to a single position is 2 AWG. When special application crimp lug/strap combination is used, maximum wire size
is as listed in SAG582126000.
Note:
LOAD A Bus may be arranged with battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers. Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE
CARDS furnished inside the cabinet's front door for location of any battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers installed.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[114]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CONNECTING LOADS TO DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLIES EQUIPPED WITH TPH-TYPE DISTRIBUTION FUSE MOUNTING BLOCKS AND/OR
GJ/218-TYPE DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT BREAKER MOUNTING BLOCKS
Lug-terminated load leads are connected to the individual load busbars located on the Distribution Bus Module and the respective
distribution ground busbar. To access these, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener
in the counterclockwise position.
•
The individual load busbars provide 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 1 inch
centers and 3/8 inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
•
The distribution ground busbar provides 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of the same type of customer-provided lugs.
Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended torque.
Note:
LOAD A Bus may be arranged with battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers. Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE
CARDS furnished inside the cabinet's front door for location of any battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers installed.
CONNECTING LOADS TO A P/N 509128 GMT FUSE DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY
Load conductors are connected to terminal block TB1 on the circuit card assembly. To access TB1, open the front door of the Distribution
Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position. TB1 provides screw clamp type terminals for
customer connection. Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for location and identification, and for recommended torque.
CONNECTING LOADS TO BULK FEED DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLIES
Lug-terminated load leads are connected to the bulk feed load busbar located on the Distribution Bus Module and the respective
distribution ground busbar. To access these, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener
in the counterclockwise position.
•
The bulk feed load busbar provides 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 1 inch
centers and 3/8 inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
•
The distribution ground busbar provides 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of the same type of customer-provided lugs.
Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended torque.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[115]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail A) Part No. 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly Load Connections
GMT DISTRIBUTION
FUSE CIRCUIT CARD
ASSEMBLY, P/N 509128
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
1A
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
10A
1B
DISTRIBUTION
FUSES F1-F10
TERMINAL
BLOCK TB1
10B
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
F11
F12
NOTE:
GMT-TYPE FUSE DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY SHOWN IN TYPICAL LOCATION IN
TYPICAL BULLET NOSE TYPE DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY.
TB1 TERMINALS 1A THROUGH 10A AND 1B THROUGH 10B CORRESPOND TO
LOAD FUSES F1 THROUGH F10.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (in-lbs)
Screw Clamp
Screw Clamp
5.0
[116]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail B) List AA and AN Load Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
F24/
CB24
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
LOAD
1/4–20 threaded holes or studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
LOAD RETURN (GND)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 44. (Detail C) List AB, AC, CB, and CD Load Connections
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LVD
CONTACTOR
(IF PRESENT)
[117]
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail D) List AD or AE Load Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
TORQUE (in-lbs.)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[118]
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail E) List AG, AJ, CG or CJ Load Connections (List AP similar) List AH Load Return Connections
LIST CG SHOWN.
LISTS AG, AJ, CJ, AP SIMILAR.
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
FUSE
LOAD
FUSE
LVD
CONTACTOR
(IF PRESENT)
LIST AH
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[119]
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail F) List AK Load Connections List AL Load Return Connections
LIST AK
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
F1/
CB1
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
F24/
CB24
MAKE LOAD RETURN CONNECTIONS TO
AN EXTERNAL LOAD RETURN BUS OR
TO LIST AL IF PROVIDED.
LIST AL
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
[120]
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail G) List AM Load Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
F20/
CB20
EMPTY
MOUNTIG
POSITION
LOAD
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
INPUT DISCONNECT
CIRCUIT BREAKER/FUSE
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
[121]
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail H) List BA Load Connections
NON-LVD-CONTROLLED
SYSTEM LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LVD-CONTROLLED
SYSTEM LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LVD-CONTROLLED
F8/ F9/
F20/
SYSTEM LOAD
CB8 CB9
CB20
NON-LVDFUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CONTROLLED
SYSTEM LOAD
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F1/
CB1
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 44. (Detail I) List CA Load Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
LOAD
1/4 –20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
F20/
LVD
CB20 CONTACTOR
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
[122]
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer)
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail J) List CE or CF Load Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
UPPER LVD
CONTACTOR
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
CONTROLLED BY UPPER
LVD CONTACTOR
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
LOWER LVD
CONTACTOR
TORQUE (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LOAD CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
CONTROLLED BY LOWER
LVD CONTACTOR
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
[123]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail K) List EA Load and Battery Connections
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 6-12.
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
LOAD CIRCUIT
BREAKERS/FUSES
LOAD
1/4 –20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
F16/
CB16
BATTERY
DISCONNNECT
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
[124]
Torque (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail L) List GB Load and Battery Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
F8/
CB8
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
FUSE
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 3-12.
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock
Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LVD
CONTACTOR
[125]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail M) List JA Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V SUBSYSTEM LOAD
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREKAERS
F1/
CB1
F16/
CB16
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F17/
CB17
F20/
CB20
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 44. (Detail N) List JB Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V
F8/
F9/
CB9
SUBSYSTEM CB8
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F1/
CB1
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
-48V
SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F20/
CB20
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
[126]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail O) List JC Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
+24V LOADS
(SUBSYSTEM) +24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
-48V LOADS
(SYSTEM)
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware.
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 44. (Detail P) List JD Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
+24V LOADS
(SUBSYSTEM)
-48V LOADS
(SYSTEM)
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware.
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
[127]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail Q) List KA Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V SUBSYSTEM LOAD
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F1/
CB1
F16/
CB16
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F17/
CB17
F20/
CB20
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 44. (Detail R) List LB Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V
-48V
LVD
F9/
F8/
F16/
CB9
CB16 CONTACTOR
SUBSYSTEM CB8
SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F1/
CB1
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
[128]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail S) List LC Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
F4/
CB4
+24V
SUBSYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F5/
CB5
-48V
SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F16/
CB16
LVD
CONTACTOR
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 44. (Detail T) List NA Battery Connections
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
BATT. RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
BATTERY DISCONNECT
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BATTERY
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
F20/
CB20
BATTERY RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
[129]
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail U) List NB Battery Connections
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS.
CONNECT PER
FIGURE 3-12.
BATTERY DISCONNECT
CIRCUIT BREAKER(S)
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
Torque (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock).
Figure 44. (Detail V) List NC Battery Connections
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
FUSE
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
[130]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail W) List ND Battery Connections
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY DISCONNECT
FUSES
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 3-12.
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 44. (Detail X) List RA or RB Battery Connections
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 3-12.
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY DISCONNECT
CONTACTOR
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
Torque (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
[131]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 44. (Detail Y) List RC, RD, and RE Battery Connections (List RC shown; List RD and RE similar)
TOP OF
DISTRIBUTION
CABINET
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
EXTENSION
PLATE
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
REAR VIEW
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
Torque (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 44. (Detail Z) List TA and TB Bulk Feed Load Distribution
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[132]
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Battery Connections to Power System
Danger:
Note:
Although battery voltage is not hazardously high, the battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise
extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed
wire connected to a battery terminal. NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one
termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary
short circuit can cause explosion and injury. Remove watches, rings, or other jewelry before connecting battery
leads. Make the DC (battery) connections last. Make all other electrical connections without DC input power
applied to the system.
Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for recommended wire sizes and crimp lugs. Refer to drawing 031110100
for lug crimping information. Refer to drawings 031110200 and 031110300 for additional lug information. The SAG and
Engineering Drawings can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system. A copy of
drawings 031110100, 031110200, and 031110300 are also located in the hardcopy INSTALLATION MANUAL for your
convenience.
There are four methods of connecting the battery, as determined by the bus arrangement and List options specified when the system
was ordered.
IF NO INTERNAL BATTERY DISCONNECT DEVICE IS PROVIDED
•
Directly to the Battery Busbar and Battery Ground Busbar: Lug-terminated input battery leads are connected to the battery
busbar and battery return (ground) busbar located within a Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front door of the
Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
These busbars are provided with 3/8-16 and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of customer provided two hole lugs with 1 or
5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes, respectively. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and
additional hardware. Refer to Figure 45A, Figure 45B, Figure 45C, and Figure 45D for lug mounting location and identification,
as well as recommended bolt length and torque.
•
Directly to Bay-to-Bay Busbars (if power system is equipped with List 2 only): Battery busbars within the Distribution Cabinets
are rated for 2000A maximum. For 2000A to 4000A, additional lug-terminated input battery leads should be connected to the
bay-to-bay battery busbar and battery return (ground) busbar that link the Distribution Cabinets in List 1 and List 2 bays.
These busbars are provided with 3/8-16 and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of customer provided two hole lugs with 1 or
5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4-inch bolt clearance holes, respectively. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and
additional hardware. Refer to Figure 45E for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length and
torque.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[133]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
IF INTERNAL BATTERY DISCONNECT FUSES OR CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE PROVIDED
•
When Distribution Bus Modules Using Bullet Nose-Type Devices (TPS/TLS Fuses and/or Bullet Nose-Type Circuit Breakers) are
Provided: Lug-terminated input battery leads are connected to the individual battery busbars located on the Distribution Bus
Module and the respective battery return (ground) busbar located in the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front
door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position. Refer to the
CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE CARDS furnished inside the cabinet's front door for location of any battery disconnect
fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s) installed.
Battery Load Side: The individual input battery busbars provide 1/4-20 threaded holes for installation of customer-provided
two-hole lugs that have 5/8 inch centers and 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting hardware.
Maximum size of wire to be connected to a single breaker/fuseholder mounting position is 2 AWG. When special application
crimp lug / strap combination is used, maximum wire size is as listed in SAG582126000. Refer to the appropriate detail of
Figure 44 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length and torque.
Battery Return (Ground) Side: The battery return (ground) busbar provides 3/8-16 and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of
customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 1 or 5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes, respectively.
Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware. Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting
location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length and torque.
•
When Distribution Bus Modules Using GJ/218 Circuit Breakers or TPH Fuses are Provided: Lug-terminated input battery leads
are connected to the individual battery busbars located on the Distribution Bus Module and the respective battery return
(ground) busbar located in the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning
and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position. Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE CARDS
furnished inside the cabinet assembly's front door for location of any battery disconnect fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s) installed.
Battery Load Side: The individual input battery busbars provide 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of customer-provided twohole lugs that have 1 inch centers and 3/8 inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length
and torque.
Battery Return (Ground) Side: The battery return (ground) busbar provides 3/8-16 and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of
customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 1 or 5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes, respectively.
Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware. Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting
location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length and torque.
IF AN INTERNAL BATTERY DISCONNECT CONTACTOR IS PROVIDED (LIST RA, RB, RC, RD, RE)
Lug-terminated input battery leads are connected to the battery return (ground) busbar and to the battery disconnect contactor busbar.
Connections to List RA and RB are located in the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by
turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position. Connections to List RC, RD, and RE are made from the rear of
the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, remove a plastic access cover from at the rear of the cabinet by first loosening the four screws
that secure it. Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 44 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt
length and torque.
IF A LORAIN BATTERY STAND UNDER POWER SYSTEM IS PROVIDED (LIST 92)
If the Power System is mounted on top of a Model 24BA1200 Battery Stand (Spec. No. 588810000), busbars for making battery
connections to the Power System are provided with the battery stand, and may have been installed at the factory. Refer to the
documentation provided with the battery stand for installation instructions.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[134]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 45A.
Battery Connections (Up to 1200A) No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided.
3/8-16 CAPTIVE NUT, 14 PLACES (CUSTOMER MUST
SUPPLY LUG, BOLTS, AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE.
BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
1/4-20 CAPTIVE NUT, 20 PLACES (CUSTOMER
MUST SUPPLY LUG, BOLTS, AND ADDITIONAL
HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
0.625
Central
Office
Ground
TOP OF
DISTRIBUTION
CABINET
2.000
0.750
0.625
2.000
1.000
0.625
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE) 0.625
BUSBAR
0.750
0.625
FRONT VIEW
0.750
0.625
0.750
0.750
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
0.625
GND RTN
-48V SUPPLY
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
ISO View
BOLT SIZE
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
TORQUE (in-lbs.)
1/4–20
72 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
3/8-16
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
[135]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 45B.
Battery Connections (1200A to 2000A), Using Battery Busbar Extension Kit (P/N 514713) No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit
Breakers, or Contactors Provided. No Interbay Busbars Provided.
3/8 CLEARANCE HOLES, 12 PLACES (CUSTOMER MUST SUPPLY LUG,
BOLTS, AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
2.000
2.000
2.000
Central
Office
Ground
2.000
TOP OF
DISTRIBUTION
CABINET
1.000
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
FRONT VIEW
GND RTN
-48V SUPPLY
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
ISO View
BOLT SIZE
3/8-16
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
[136]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 45C.
Battery Connections (1200A to 2000A), Using Battery Busbar Extension Kit (P/N 529143) No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit
Breakers, or Contactors Provided. No Interbay Busbars Provided.
3/8 CLEARANCE HOLES, 24 PLACES
(CUSTOMER MUST SUPPLY LUG, BOLTS,
AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE.
BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
TOP OF DISTRIBUTION CABINET
Central
Office
Ground 1.312
1.312
1.000
48V
FRONT
VIEW
GND RTN
-48V SUPPLY
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
Plastic Shield
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
BOLT SIZE
3/8-16
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
[137]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 45D. Battery Connections, Using Battery Landing Busbar Kit (P/N 541371) No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors
Provided. No Interbay Busbars Provided.
1/4-20 x 0.875" Studs
on 0.625" Centers,
24 Places (Customer must
supply additional hardware.)
Rear View
(Two Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
Plastic Shield
-48V SUPPLY
GND RTN
Up to Six (6) Battery Leads (per polarity)
STUD SIZE
1/4-20 x
0.875” on
0.625” Centers
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
[138]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 45E.
Battery Connections (1200A to 4000A) No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided. Bay-to-Bay Busbars
Provided.
Battery Lug
Landing Points
See Detail A
GND RETURN
Interbay Busbar Assembly
-48V SUPPLY
Interbay Busbar Assembly
3/8-16 CAPTIVE NUT, 8 PLACES PER BUS
(CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE LUG BOLTS
AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
2-3/8"
2-3/8"
2-3/8"
13/16"
13/16"
13/16"
13/16"
Rear View
5/8"
1"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
1-5/8"
1-5/8"
1/4-20 CAPTIVE NUT, 12 PLACES PER BUS
(CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE LUG BOLTS
AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
DETAIL A
BOLT SIZE
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
TORQUE (in-lbs.)
1/4–20
72 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
3/8-16
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
[139]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Rear Busbar Shield onto the LMS1000 (List 80)
Note:
If the power system was ordered in a relay rack, this procedure has been performed at the factory.
Procedure:
1. Using wire cutters, remove cut-outs from the clear plastic shield as required for busbar clearance.
2.
Fasten the shield to its mounting brackets with furnished hardware as shown in Figure 46.
Figure 46. Installing Rear Busbar Shield on List 80
REAR
VIEW
COVER
P/N 528515
6-32 x 1/2" THREAD FORMING
MACHINE SCREW
(4 PLACES)
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[140]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers (List 2 Only)
Procedure
1.
After bay-to-bay busbars have been installed, and battery connections made to them as required, furnished covers should be
installed. Refer to Figure 47 for details.
Figure 47. Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers
Part No. 513862 End Cover.
2 Furnished with List 2.
Attach each with (2) 6-32 x 3/8" screws,
lock washers and flat washers.
Part No. 117843 Standoff Insulator.
(1) furnished with List 2.
Thread onto 1/4 -20 stud on GND busbar
as shown.
Insert tab on rear cover in
slot on side cover.
(Same on both ends.)
Part No. 513860 Rear Cover.
(1) furnished with List 2.
Attach with (4) 6-32 x 3/8" screws,
lock washers and flat washers and
(1) 1/4-20 x 1/2" screw and flatwasher.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[141]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing and Connecting Batteries in List 93 (If Provided)
ADMONISHMENTS
Danger:
THIS EQUIPMENT IS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH LEAD-ACID BATTERIES. WORKING NEAR LEAD-ACID
BATTERIES IS DANGEROUS!
•
•
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid.
Batteries may generate explosive gases.
Batteries are an energy source that can produce high amounts of electrical current.
FOR THESE REASONS, IT IS OF CRITICAL IMPORTANCE THAT YOU READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND FOLLOW THEM EXACTLY.
WHEN WORKING WITH LEAD-ACID BATTERIES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wear complete protection for eyes, face, hands, and clothing. Examples are safety goggles or face shield, a rubber apron, and
gloves.
If battery acid enters your eye, immediately flush your eye with running cold water for at least 15 minutes. Get medical
attention immediately.
If battery acid contacts skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap and water.
NEVER smoke or allow a flame or spark near batteries.
NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one terminal of a battery at a time, or to simultaneously
contact a terminal and a grounded object (such as the battery enclosure). Even a momentary short circuit can cause sparking
or explosion. To avoid such short circuits:
 Remove watches, bracelets and rings.
 Use only tools having insulated handles.
 If insulated tools are not available, completely cover tool handles with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of vinyl
electrical tape.
 Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end exposed.
Always follow the battery manufacturer's recommendations and admonishments.
BATTERY MANUFACTURER INFORMATION
Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for specifications and manufacturers of the batteries to be installed in this power
system.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[142]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
INSTALLING AND CONNECTING BATTERIES
Procedure
Note:
Refer to Figure 48 as this procedure is performed.
1.
If Battery Trays are Equipped With Circuit Breakers: Turn OFF the Battery Disconnect circuit breakers located on all battery
trays. Refer to Figure 48 for locations.
2.
Remove the Battery Retention Bracket as shown in Figure 48. To do so, remove the four 1/4-20 x 5/8” bolts and associated
washers.
3.
Slide batteries into the tray, with the battery terminals toward the front as shown in Figure 48. Slide batteries into the tray as far
as they will go.
Note:
The Battery Retention Bracket can be oriented two ways to accommodate batteries of different lengths. A correctly oriented
bracket will fit snuggly against the batteries. If your batteries require the alternate bracket orientation shown in Detail A of
Figure 48, remove and reinstall the bullet-shaped spacers as shown in Detail A before performing the next step.
4.
Reinstall the Battery Retention Bracket. The spacers on the bracket should separate the batteries from each other. Secure with
the hardware removed in a previous step. Refer to Figure 48 for washer location.
5.
Connect three links supplied by the battery manufacturer between pairs of battery terminals as shown in Figure 48. Use
hardware furnished by the battery manufacturer. Torque hardware to battery manufacturer’s recommendations.
6.
Ensure the battery cable ends in all trays are insulated with sleeving before performing the next step.
Danger:
In multiple-tray installations, when batteries in one tray are connected, the battery cables in all trays will be
energized. Remove sleeving from and connect one cable at a time. Do not allow cable end to contact the
battery tray or equipment rack.
Warning:
In the next step, observe correct polarity. Connect only cable labeled “+” to battery terminal labeled “+”.
Likewise, connect only cable labeled “–” to battery terminal labeled “–”.
7.
Connect the cables found in the battery tray to the battery terminals, “+” to “+” and”–“ to “– “. Observe correct polarity. Refer
to Figure 48. Secure with kit-furnished hardware as shown in the figure. Torque hardware to battery manufacturer’s
recommendations.
8.
Repeat steps 1 through 7 for any remaining battery trays.
9.
If Battery Trays Are Equipped With Circuit Breakers: To connect the batteries to the Power System, turn ON the Battery
Disconnect circuit breakers located on all battery trays.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[143]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 48. List 93 Battery Installation Details
Connect link furnished
with battery to these
2 terminals.
Connect link furnished
with battery to these
2 terminals.
Connect NEG (-)
battery cable to
this terminal.
Connect link furnished
with battery to these
2 terminals.
Connect POS (+)
battery cable to
this terminal.
Battery Retention
Bracket.
See Detail A for
alternate orientation.
1/4-20 X 5/8" Bolt
1/4" Ground Washer
(1 place)
Spacers
Separate
Batteries
(3 places
per tray)
If trays are
equipped with
circuit breakers,
TURN OFF ALL
circuit breakers
before installing
and connecting
any batteries!
1/4-20 X 5/8" Bolt
1/4" Lock Washer
1/4" Flat Washer
3 Places
Note:
1. Two trays shown
as example.
2. Cabling detail
omitted.
10-32 x 1/2" Pan Head Screw (3 Places)
No. 10 Flat Washer (3 Places)
No. 10 Lock Washer (3 Places)
Spacer (3 Places)
1/4" Ground
Washer
(1 Place)
1/4-20 x 5/8" Hex
Head Screw
(4 Places)
1/4-20 Lock Washer
(3 Places)
1/4-20 Flat Washer
(3 Places)
DETAIL A
Alternate Orientaiton
of Retention Bracket
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[144]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
INSTALLING OPTIONAL FRONT BATTERY COVER (23” TRAYS ONLY)
Procedure
1.
Follow the procedure in Figure 49.
Figure 49. Installing Optional Front Battery Cover
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[145]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
INSTALLING OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER GUARD
Procedure
1.
Follow the procedure in Figure 50.
Figure 50. Installing Optional Circuit Breaker Guard
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[146]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134
KIT CONTENTS
External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134 provides the following components.
(1) 433800164 Shunt Monitoring Circuit Card (Shunt POD)
(1) 343364100 Mounting Plate
(4) 233373300 6-32 Screw
(1) 421815700 Jumper
(1) 421815800 Jumper
(1) 541131 Jumper
(6) 246730810 Insulated Butt Splice
(25) 237650200 Cable Tie
(1) 247873700 Socket
(1) 247873800 Plug
(3) 245381600 Pins
(3) 245381700 Pins
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Refer to Table 8 and Table 9 for selecting shunt capacity on the Shunt POD. The remote shunt must match one of the shunts shown in
the tables.
The JP1 jumper on the Shunt POD should be set for “system shunt” (open).
Using the (4) 6-32 screws, mount the Shunt POD to the mounting plate. Locate the mounting plate as close to the remote shunt as
possible.
Make the following connections. Refer to Figure 51 for a block diagram.
Terminate the flat, black connector onto the Shunt POD.
Connect the black (-Shunt) and red (+Shunt) leads to the remote shunt.
Using the appropriate ends of the jumpers; mate the 421815700, 421815800, and 541131 jumpers as required. (Note that the
421815800 jumper consists of (2) separate jumpers. One 10' and the other 20'. This gives you three options for length of 10', 20', or
30'. The 541131 jumper is 10' long.)
If the remote shunt is greater than 40 feet from the 582126000 Power System, the 541131 jumper must be modified to lengthen it.
THE SPLICE MUST BE MADE AT THE POWER SYSTEM END (larger wire should be used if the distance is significant)! Using the
insulated butt splices, cut the 541131 jumper and add the additional wires for the required length. Ensure the splices are crimped
properly. (Another option is to make a jumper of the appropriate length using the 247873700 socket, 247873800 plug, 245381600
pins, and 245381700 pins. Use 20 or 22 gauge wire; preferably R-W, W-BK, and BL color. Use hand crimp tool AMP P/N 9144-B.
Terminate one end of the 3 wires with the 245381700 pins and insert into the 247873700 socket as follows. Insert the R-W into
position 1, the W-BK wire into position 2, and the BL wire into position 3. Terminate the other end of the 3 wires with the
245381600 pins and insert into the 247873800 plug as follows. Insert the R-W into position 1, the W-BK wire into position 2, and
the BL wire into position 3. This jumper can be inserted on the end of the 421815800 jumper.)
On the 541131 jumper, insert the 25 pin connector into J1 of 509532 Circuit Card located at the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet
in the 582126000 System, and secure slide latch.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[147]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
On the 541131 jumper, attach the fused R-W wire to BATTERY and the W-BK wire to RTN BATTERY using 1/4-20 hardware (not
provided). The R-W wire is protected with a 3A in line fuse.
On the 541131 jumper, the yellow wire can be used to connect an external FA alarm to the MCA. Attach and crimp an external FA
lead to the yellow wire butt splice as required.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Shunt POD Circuit Card 50mV Shunt Capacity Selection Switch S1 Settings
Switch S1 Position
Shunt
Capacity
Switch S1 Position
Shunt
Capacity
0
100A
8
1200A
1
200A
9
1600A
2
300A
A
2000A
3
400A
B
3000A
4
500A
C
4000A
5
600A
D
5000A
6
800A
E
8000A
7
1000A
F
10000A
Shunt POD Circuit Card 25mV Shunt Capacity Selection Switch S1 Settings
Shunt
Capacity
Switch S1 Position
Shunt
Capacity
0
50A
8
600A
1
100A
9
800A
2
150A
A
1000A
3
200A
B
1500A
4
250A
C
2000A
5
300A
D
2500A
6
400A
E
4000A
7
500A
F
5000A
Switch S1 Position
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[148]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Figure 51. External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134
-Shunt
+Shunt
To Remote Shunt
Black
J1
Red
421815700
Jumper
Shunt Monitoring
Circuit Card (POD)
433800164
421815800
Jumper
FA
Y
541131
Jumper
Connect to
25-Pin Connector J1
of 509532 Circuit Card
located at the bottom
of the Distribution Cabinet
in the 582126000 System
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[149]
3A
W-BK
RTN
BAT
R-W
BAT
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing Modules
Installing the Rectifier Modules
Rectifier Modules can be inserted or removed with power applied (hot swappable).
Note:
The Rectifier Module locks into the Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf through a latch located on the underside of the Rectifier
Module. The latch and Rectifier Module handle are interactive. Push the handle into the Rectifier Module’s front panel, and the
latch will pop out from the Rectifier Module bottom. Click the handle to pop it out from the Rectifier Module’s front panel, and
the latch will retract back into the Rectifier Module. The latch mechanism is shown in Figure 52.
Warning:
Note:
To prevent damage to the latching mechanism, ensure the handle is in the open position when installing or
removing a module. NEVER hold the handle in the closed position when installing a module into a shelf.
588705000 List 3 Rectifier Mounting Shelves Only (3-Phase Input): One three-phase input feeds the three Rectifier Modules on
the left-hand side of the shelf. The second three-phase input feeds the modules on the right-hand side. To maintain phase
balance, install Rectifier Modules in groups of three; that is, fill all three mounting positions on the left and/or all three on the
right.
Figure 52. Handle/Latch Mechanism on the Rectifier Module
Procedure
1.
Remove blank cover panels from the mounting positions into which Rectifier Modules are to be installed.
2.
Place the Rectifier Module into an unoccupied mounting slot without sliding it in completely.
3.
Click the Rectifier Module handle in order to pop it forwards out of the Rectifier Module’s front panel (this will also retract the
latch mechanism located on the underside of the Rectifier Module).
4.
Now push the Rectifier Module completely into the shelf.
5.
Push the handle into the front panel of the Rectifier Module. This will make the latch lock the Rectifier Module securely to the
shelf.
6.
Repeat the above steps for each Rectifier Module being installed in the system.
7.
After the Rectifier Modules are physically installed in the mounting shelf(s), they are ready for operation immediately after
power is supplied to them.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[150]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Installing the Converter Modules in List 63 and 64 (if furnished)
Note:
This task only applies if system is equipped with List 63 / List 64 Converter Mounting Shelf.
Warning:
Each Converter Module contains static-sensitive devices. Read the Static Statement at the front of this manual
before performing this procedure.
Procedure
Note:
If installing less than eight Converter Modules, be aware that the modules in Mounting Positions 3 and 7 must be removed if the
alarm circuit card assembly should require replacement. See Figure 53.
1.
If not already done, remove blank modules from any mounting position into which a Converter Module is to be installed.
2.
Ensure that the ON/STANDBY switch on the each Converter Module is in the STANDBY (
3.
Slide each Converter Module into a mounting position in the shelf. Secure by tightening the captive fastener located on the
front panel.
4.
Ensure that all mounting positions are occupied, by either a Converter Module or a blank module.
) position.
Figure 53. Converter Module Mounting Positions in List 63 and 64
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
MODULE
POSITION
1
MODULE
POSITION
2
MODULE
POSITION
3
MODULE
POSITION
4
MODULE
POSITION
5
MODULE
POSITION
6
MODULE
POSITION
7
MODULE
POSITION
8
ALARM
CIRCUIT
CARD
ASSEMBLY
[151]
NOTE:
MODULES IN
POSITIONS 3 AND 7 MUST
BE REMOVED TO
REPLACE ALARM CIRCUIT
CARD ASSEMBLY.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Initially Starting the System
Initially Starting, Configuring, and Checking System Operation
ADMONISHMENT
Caution:
Performing various steps in the following procedures may cause a service interruption and/or result in the
extension of alarms. Notify any appropriate personnel before starting these procedures. Also, notify personnel
when these procedures are completed.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
In the following procedures, all controls and indicators are located on the MCA Local Interface Pad, unless otherwise stated. Refer to
System Operating Procedures of the separate User Instructions (Section 5975) for controls and indicators locations and descriptions. Section
5975 can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
The MCA Local Interface Pad is located on the front of the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 54.
Figure 54. MCA Local Interface Pad and Display
FUNCTION
SELECT
ALARM CUTOFF
MAJOR MINOR
AC
DISPLAY
TEST
EQ
FUNCTION
SET
YES
ENTER
NO
Navigating the MCA
Section 6022 provides a color MCA Menu Tree. Section 6022 is located in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER
MANUAL. It is also provided on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Navigating the MCA is an easy process. You just have to remember a few key combinations (as shown in the following chart).
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[152]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
TASK
KEY OR KEY COMBINATIONS
FUNCTION
SET
At any level in the MCA menus,
pressing YES and NO simultaneously
takes you back to the beginning of the
MCA menu tree.
YES
Getting to Home Position
NO
You can travel left to right from one
menu to another by pressing ENTER.
You can also go back to a specified
menu by pressing ENTER while the
menu's name is being displayed.
FUNCTION
SET
Moving from One Menu
to Another Menu
ENTER
Press Up Arrow to move up the list of
available entries in the active menu.
Press Down Arrow to move down the
list of available entries in the active
menu.
FUNCTION
SELECT
Moving Within a Menu
Changing a Value or Setting
Entering the
Adjustment/Change
Setting Mode
NOTES
FUNCTION
SET
ALARM
CUTOFF
ENTER
FUNCTION
SET
Changing a value or setting requires
four (4) steps.
1.
With the current value or setting
being displayed, simultaneously
press ENTER and ALARM
CUTOFF.
2.
To increase the value or change
the setting, press YES. To
decrease the value or change the
setting, press NO.
3.
With the correct value or setting
being displayed, press ENTER.
4.
To accept the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
YES. To reject the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
NO.
YES
Changing the
Value or Setting
NO
FUNCTION
SET
Locking the Change
ENTER
FUNCTION
SET
YES
Confirming the Change
NO
Changing a Control Function
Entering the
Adjustment/Change
Setting Mode
FUNCTION
SET
ALARM
CUTOFF
ENTER
FUNCTION
SET
YES
Confirming the Change
NO
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[153]
Changing a control function requires
two (2) steps.
1.
With the control function menu
item being displayed,
simultaneously press ENTER and
ALARM CUTOFF.
2.
To accept the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
the YES. To reject the change,
at the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt
press NO.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
PRE-CHARGING LOAD CAPACITORS
When required, use the List 79 Capacitor Precharge Assembly to initially charge DC load capacitors prior to closing the respective
distribution circuit breaker or installing a distribution fuse. A clip cord is provided for connecting to the GJ/218-type circuit breaker or
TPH-type fuseholder terminals. For operating information, refer to the Precharge Assembly's Instructions (Section 5823). Section 5823 can
be found in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL, and on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
INITIAL STARTUP PREPARATION
•
Ensure that all blocks except the last one in the Installation Acceptance Checklist have been checked.
•
Ensure that a Bypass Circuit Card (P/N 117086) is installed in every unused Quad Shunt POD Circuit Card or Quad Low Voltage
Disconnect Circuit Card Mounting Position in every Distribution Cabinet in the Power System.
•
Ensure that all Rectifier Module mounting positions are filled, either by a Rectifier Module or a blank cover panel.
•
If Converter Modules are provided, ensure that the Standby/Operate switch on each Converter Module is placed to the
"standby" position.
INITIALLY STARTING THE SYSTEM
Procedure
Note:
1.
Before system (MCA) startup, be prepared to view the MCA Display. Different user actions are required depending on what is
displayed.
Apply DC input power to the system by closing the external DC disconnect(s) or protective device(s) that supplies battery power
to the system. Observe and record the MCA Configuration Spec. No. briefly displayed as the MCA starts.
Note the possible MCA Configuration Spec. Nos. for your power system in the following table.
Power System List No.
Configuration No.
10
534876
11
534877
12
534878
13
534879
2.
Apply AC input power to the system by closing the external AC disconnects or protective devices that supply AC power to the
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves. Rectifier Modules automatically start.
3.
If Converter Modules are provided, place the ON/STANDBY switch on each Converter Module to the ON ( I ) position.
4.
Open the Distribution Cabinet(s) front door by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
5.
If List RB, RC, or RD (manual battery disconnect) is furnished, place the BATTERY DISCONNECT switch in the NORM position.
6.
Place each distribution circuit breaker (if furnished) to the ON position.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[154]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
MCA INITIALIZATION
Whenever a system is initially started (or the MCA has been replaced), the MCA performs an initialization routine, as detailed here.
During this period "INITIALIZING..." is displayed along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds.
Note:
During MCA startup, one of three scenarios may occur. Be prepared to view the MCA Display. Different user actions are
required depending on which scenario occurs.
Scenario One: On initial MCA startup, the display will briefly show the proper value for the MCA Configuration Spec. No. and
System Voltage for two seconds, then continue on.
Scenario Two: On initial MCA startup, the display will immediately pause at "MUST SET SPEC NO.".
Scenario Three: On initial MCA startup, the display will briefly show an MCA Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage for
two seconds other than the proper value, then continue on.
Note:
After power-up, you can also view the MCA Configuration Spec. No. Refer to Line Item "Spec. No." in the MCA INVENTORY
MENU. Another option if you miss the displayed MCA Configuration Spec. No., is to simply remove and reapply MCA input
power to restart the MCA initialization process.
Procedure 1
(the Proper MCA Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage was Briefly Displayed)
Perform one of the following steps, as determined by what is being displayed.
"SET ##V DEFAULTS" Displayed
Description: If the MCA detects that it is configured for proper voltage operation consistent with the Rectifier Modules (e.g. set for 48V
operation and 48V Rectifier Modules detected), the MCA then compares the output capacities (amps) and serial numbers of all Rectifier
Modules with what it has stored in memory. If any Rectifier Module capacity does not match the value stored or if none of the serial
numbers match, the MCA displays "SET ##V DEFAULTS".
Note:
If this system was factory set with customer specified settings that are different than the defaults listed in the System
Application Guide (SAG), do not reset all stored variables to factory defaults. Instead, see "To Start the System with the MCA's
Existing Setpoints Procedure:".
To Reset all Stored Variables to Factory Defaults Procedure:
1.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
2.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
3.
The MCA displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it is resetting the
variables, followed by "CHECK SETPOINTS".
4.
As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK
SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for your installation, change the value
as required.
a.
To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
b.
The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c.
Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or decrease, respectively, the setting.
d.
Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION
SET NO (-) pushbutton to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[155]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
f.
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g.
Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
5.
When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE
SYSTEM" is displayed.
6.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
7.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
8.
The MCA briefly displays " INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it is starting
the system.
To Start the System with the MCA's Existing Setpoints Procedure:
1.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
2.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? + -" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton.
3.
The MCA displays "CHECK SETPOINTS" during and after system startup. Press the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN pushbutton
to move to the "System Adjustment Menu". Check each setting for your installation, change as required.
"MUST SET SYS=##V" Displayed
Description: If the MCA detects that it is configured for voltage operation not consistent with the Rectifier Modules (e.g. set for 24V
operation and 48V Rectifier Modules detected, or set for 48V operation and 24V Rectifier Modules are detected), the MCA displays
"MUST SET SYS=##V".
Procedure:
1.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
2.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
3.
The MCA displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it reconfigures itself
for proper voltage operation, and then displays "CHECK SETPOINTS".
4.
As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK
SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for the application.
a.
To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
b.
The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c.
Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or decrease, respectively, the setting.
d.
Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION
SET NO (-) pushbutton to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f.
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g.
Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
5.
When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE
SYSTEM" is displayed.
6.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
7.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[156]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
8.
The MCA briefly displays " INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it is starting
the system.
"CHECK SETPOINTS" Displayed
Description: If some serial numbers match, MCA starts the system using the MCA's existing setpoints. The MCA displays "CHECK
SETPOINTS" during and after system startup.
Procedure:
1.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN pushbutton to move to the "System Adjustment Menu". Check all MCA settings.
"SYSTEM OK" or "## ALARMS ACTIVE" Displayed
Description: If all serial numbers match, the MCA starts the system using its existing setpoints. After the system is started, the MCA
displays "SYSTEM OK" or "## ALARMS ACTIVE".
Procedure:
1.
Go to the "System Adjustment Menu", and check all MCA settings.
Procedure 2
(MCA Displays "MUST SET SPEC NO.")
1.
Note:
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons until the proper MCA Configuration Spec. No. and
System Voltage are shown.
Selecting an MCA Configuration Spec. No. or System Voltage different from your system's original will alter system
performance, and is not recommended. Refer to the System Application Guide (SAG) to determine the proper MCA
Configuration (Spec. No.) and system voltage.
2.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
3.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
4.
The MCA displays “CHANGING SPEC” then "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds
while it reconfigures itself for proper operation, and then displays "CHECK SETPOINTS".
5.
As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK
SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for the application.
a.
To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
b.
The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c.
Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or decrease, respectively, the setting.
d.
Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION
SET NO (-) pushbutton to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f.
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g.
Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
6.
When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE
SYSTEM" is displayed.
7.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
8.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[157]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
9.
The MCA briefly displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it is starting
the system.
Procedure 3
(an MCA Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage other than the Proper Value was Briefly Displayed)
1.
Immediately depress and hold the ALARM CUTOFF, FUNCTION SELECT UP, and FUNCTION SELECT DOWN pushbuttons at the
same time while the display is showing the MCA "SPEC" number and then the "MCA SW ##.##.## " version number. Only after
the "MCA SW ##.##.##" version number goes off, release the three buttons.
"SET ###### @ ##V" should appear.
Note:
2.
Note:
The pushbuttons must be depressed before "INITIALIZING ##" appears on the display. Remove and re-apply MCA input power to
restart this step, if necessary.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons until the proper MCA Configuration Spec. No. and
System Voltage are shown.
Selecting an MCA Configuration Spec. No. or System Voltage different from your system's original will alter system
performance, and is not recommended. Refer to the System Application Guide (SAG) to determine the proper MCA
Configuration (Spec. No.) and system voltage.
3.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
4.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
5.
The MCA displays “CHANGING SPEC” then "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds
while it reconfigures itself for proper operation, and then displays "CHECK SETPOINTS".
6.
As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK
SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for the application.
a.
To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
b.
The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c.
Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or decrease, respectively, the setting.
d.
Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION
SET NO (-) pushbutton to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f.
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g.
Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
7.
When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE
SYSTEM" is displayed.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
9.
At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
10. The MCA briefly displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it is starting
the system.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[158]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CHECK SETPOINTS Adjustable Values
1.
FLOAT = ##.##V
##.##V = float voltage setting for all Rectifier Modules
2.
TEST/EQ = ##.##V
##.##V = test equalize voltage setting for all Rectifier Modules
3.
SET HVS = ##.##V
##.##V = high voltage shutdown setting for all Rectifier Modules
4.
CURRLIM = #####A
#####A = system current limit setting, current limit circuit on all Rectifier Modules are
automatically adjusted to ensure system current does not exceed this value
CURRLIM = #####MAX
system
#####MAX = the sum of the maximum capabilities of all Rectifier Modules installed in the
5.
SYS HV1 = ##.##V
##.##V = system high voltage alarm 1 setting
6.
SYS HV2 = ##.##V
##.##V = system high voltage alarm 2 setting
7.
SYS BOD = ##.##V
##.##V = system battery on discharge alarm setting
8.
SYS 50% (VERYLOVOLT) = ##.##V
##.##V = system 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage) alarm setting
9.
SYSCURR = #####A
####A = system current alarm setting
10. SUB HV = ##.##V
##.##V = subsystem high voltage alarm setting
11. SUB LV = ##.##V
##.##V = subsystem low voltage alarm setting
12. SUBCURR = #####A
####A = subsystem current alarm setting
13. LVD ** = ##.#V
LVD** = number assigned to the low voltage disconnect circuit detected,
each low voltage disconnect circuit detected in the system is displayed separately
##.#V = respective low voltage disconnect circuit "disconnect" setting
14. LV RECON = ##.#V
MANUAL RECONNECT
##.#V = reconnect setting for all low voltage
disconnect circuits detected, or manual reconnect
15. TC CAL = ##.##V
ANALOG TC OFF
TempCmp Hardware
##.##V = calibration voltage value written on
battery charge temperature
compensation module, or off
16. DIGITAL TC OFF
SLOPE = .###V/ºC
TempCmp Hardware
digital temperature compensation off, or
slope parameter setting
17. MAX W/T = ##.##V
##.##V = maximum voltage with temperature compensation setting
18. MIN W/T = ##.##V
##.##V = minimum voltage with temperature compensation setting
19. HI TEMP 1 = ###ºC
HI TEMP 1 IS OFF
###ºC = high temperature 1 alarm setting, or
high temperature 1 alarm off
(if TXM installed, each temperature probe has an associated alarm)
20. LO TEMP 1 = ###ºC
LO TEMP 1 IS OFF
###ºC = low temperature 1 alarm setting, or
low temperature 1 alarm off
(if TXM installed, each temperature probe has an associated alarm)
21. ****A PLACES = ##
****A = amperage of each type of Rectifier Module,
each type of Rectifier Module is displayed separately
## = number of total (filled and empty) shelf positions available for this amperage Rectifier
Module
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[159]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
22. START THE SYSTEM
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously. At the "ARE YOU SURE? + -" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton to start system.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton to go back and change more setpoints before
starting the system. Use the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons to
scroll through the list of adjustable values as previously described.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[160]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
INITIALLY CONNECTING LOW VOLTAGE DISCONNECT CIRCUITS (IF FURNISHED)
If the low voltage disconnect circuit(s) (if furnished) is set for manual reconnect, the battery and system output have to be initially
connected to the controlled load(s). (Battery voltage must be above the upper setting of the low voltage disconnect circuit.) If there are
active low voltage disconnect alarms, perform the following procedure to initially connect battery and system output to the controlled
load(s).
Procedure
1.
With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ALARM LVD ACTIVE".
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until the low voltage disconnect circuit to be
reconnected is displayed ("RECONNECT LVD**", **=the designation of the low voltage disconnect circuit).
5.
To reconnect the low voltage disconnect circuit being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
6.
"ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The low voltage disconnect circuit
reconnects.
7.
If the system contains additional low voltage disconnect circuits, separately reconnect these by repeating steps 5) through 6).
8.
When done, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously. You are returned to the
beginning of the MCA menu tree.
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
If the MCA Initialization procedure was performed, go to step 14). If not (or if you want to verify the inventory), proceed with
step 5).
5.
"VERIFY INVENTORY" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "VACANT ****A = ##" is displayed. (****A
is the amperage of the Rectifier Module)
7.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. "****A PLACES = ##" is
displayed, ****A is the amperage of the Rectifier Module. Portion of the display flashes.
8.
Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed equals the total (filled and empty) number of
available mounting positions in the system for this amperage of Rectifier Module, then release the pushbutton.
9.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
10. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
11. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "VACANT ****A = ##". Repeat steps 7) through
10) for any other amperage Rectifier Modules available positions.
12. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[161]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
13. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
14. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SHARE ALARM OFF" or "SHARE ALARM ON" is displayed.
This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 15) and 16). To keep this setting, proceed with
step 17).
15. To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
16. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "EMERG STOP ON" or " EMERG STOP OFF" is displayed.
This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 18) and 19). To keep this setting, proceed with
step 20).
18. To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
19. "ARE YOU SURE? +_" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
20. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until " REMOTE HVS ON" or " REMOTE HVS OFF
SEE USER MANUAL" is displayed. This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 21) through
22). To keep this setting, proceed with step 23).
21. To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
22. "ARE YOU SURE? +_" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
23. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "DISPLAY ROLL OFF" or "DISPLAY ROLL ON" is
displayed. This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 24) and 25). To keep this setting,
proceed with step 26).
Note:
For Initial Startup and Checkout, "DISPLAY ROLL OFF" is preferred.
24. To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
25. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
26. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "LO SPEED FAN OFF" or "LO SPEED FAN ON"
is displayed. This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 27) and 28). To keep this setting,
proceed with step 29) or 34).
27. To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
28. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
Note:
Do not perform steps 29) through 34) if the system is not equipped with external MCA Audible Alarm relay contacts.
29. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "NAG MINUTES = ##" or "AUDIBLE NAG OFF".
30. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "NAG MINUTES =" portion of
the display flashes.
31. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed equals the desired MCA audible alarm cutoff
reset time period or "AUDIBLE NAG OFF", then release the pushbutton.
32. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
33. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
34. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "TEST/EQ HRS = ##".
35. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of
the display flashes.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[162]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
36. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed equals the desired timed test/equalize period.
Note:
To disable the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value goes
above 99. "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is then displayed.
37. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
38. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
39. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "AUTO EQ MUL = ##" or "AUTO EQ DISABLED".
Note:
For Initial Startup and Checkout, "AUTO EQ DISABLED" is preferred.
Note:
If "AUTO EQ MUL = ##" is displayed, the system is already set for Automatic Equalize. In this case, you can proceed with steps
40) through 43) to change the current setting, or proceed with step 44) if no changes are required.
Note:
If "END AUTO ##.##HR" is displayed, the system is already set for Automatic Equalize, and an Automatic Equalize is in progress.
In this case, you can proceed with steps 40) through 43) to cancel the Automatic Equalize in progress and change the current
setting, or proceed with step 44) to proceed with the Automatic Equalize in progress and make no changes.
40. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "AUTO EQ MUL =" portion of
the display flashes.
41. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the desired value is displayed, then release the pushbutton. Note
that as you scroll below 1, "AUTO EQ DISABLED" is displayed. Scroll back up to redisplay "AUTO EQ MUL =".
42. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
43. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
44. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "RELAYTEST = ###SEC".
45. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "RELAYTEST =" portion of the
display flashes.
46. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed equals the desired timed period for the Alarm
Relay Test feature.
47. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
48. "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
49. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
SETTING UP THE MCA ETHERNET OPTION TCP/IP (AND SNMP IF REQUIRED) PARAMETERS (LISTS 75, 76, 77, AND 78 ONLY)
TCP/IP Parameters
Three settings are required to allow the MCA to communicate on your TCP/IP network. These are…
IP Address
(_____________________) record here
IP Netmask
(_____________________) record here
IP Gateway
(_____________________) record here
These parameters are typically assigned by your Information Technology (IT) department. It is advisable to request this information at
the beginning of the installation to give your IT department time to fill your request. Once the above IP addresses are received, record
them on this document and perform the appropriate procedure below.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[163]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Power System's TCP/IP Network Address (IP Address)
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
An IP address is a unique identifying number that your computer uses during its time on the internet. Traffic coming from you or going to
you is routed based on your IP address, which identifies the unique machine you are on and its place in the internet. For instance,
198.147.241.20 is the IP address of host whitehouse.gov. All packets on the internet destined for whitehouse.gov are sent to this IP
address by the Domain Name Service. All traffic coming from this host is identified as such because the packets contain the originating IP
address in the packet headers. All routing and traffic on the internet ultimately depends on IP addresses.
Power System's TCP/IP Netmask Address (IP Netmask)
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
A netmask is a series of bits designed to 'mask' certain portions of an IP address. The standard netmask for a class C network like FlashNet
is 255.255.255.0 - basically the last octet, .0, says 'look here for the machine number, the rest (255) is network number'. The primary use
for netmasks is in subnetting.
Power System's TCP/IP Gateway Address (IP Gateway)
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
A gateway is a computer that lies at the intersection of two networks and routes traffic correctly between them, while keeping traffic
internal to the two networks separated. A gateway, such as a Cisco router, lies at the border between network1.net and network2.net. It
correctly routes traffic bound for the internet out to its destination, while keeping traffic meant for within network1 on the network1.net
side of the router and traffic for network2 on the network2.net side.
SNMP Parameters
Additional parameters are set per site requirements for SNMP support.
"Community String"
String of alpha/numeric characters.
An SNMP community is a relationship between an SNMP agent and a set of SNMP managers that defines authentication, access control,
and proxy characteristics. The community concept is a local one, defined at the managed system. The managed system establishes one
community for each desired combination of authentication, access control, and proxy characteristics. Each community is given a
community name, and the management stations.
The GET community name to authenticate GET, GETNEXT, and GETBULK requests.
Note:
In this application, only the GET community name can be set.
"Trap Addresses"
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
A list of IP addresses to which SNMP Traps will be sent. The machine with this IP address must have appropriate SNMP browser running.
SNMP Traps V2 are sent.
Procedure
This procedure is for setting the MCA Ethernet card’s IP parameters via the Web Interface. If your Ethernet card was ordered with the
SNMP option, steps for setting SNMP parameters are included. It requires that you temporarily change the IP setup on your computer
(PC).
Note:
Windows 98 or later required to setup network connection.
This procedure requires a Permission Level of 8. The factory default user name and password provide Level 8 access. (For information
about Permission Levels, see the separate Ethernet Card Web Interface User instructions, Section 5982).
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[164]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Step 1:
Step 2:
Record your PC's Network Settings
Record your current network settings for the computer you will be using to set the MCA Ethernet card's IP parameters. You
will use these values in step 4.
Change your PC's Network Settings
Change your computer's IP parameters to talk to the MCA Ethernet Card using the card's default parameters.
a.
b.
c.
Step 3:
Step 4:
Step 5:
Step 6:
192.168.1.1, set your computer to 192.168.1.2 (IP Address).
255.255.255.0, set your computer to the same (Subnet Mask).
192.168.1.1, set your computer to the same (Gateway).
Change the MCA Ethernet Card's Network Settings
Connect the MCA Ethernet card into your company's network. Use Internet Explorer to change the MCA Ethernet card’s
default IP parameters to the parameters issued by your IT department.
If your PC cannot access the MCA Ethernet card, it may be necessary to bypass your company network by using a
"crossover" cable connected directly between your PC and the MCA Ethernet Card.
Reset your PC's Network Settings
Reset your computer's IP parameters back to their original values noted in step 1. If using a crossover cable, first reconnect
your computer to your company's network and connect the MCA Ethernet card to your company's network.
Change the MCA Ethernet Card's SNMP Settings
(if equipped with SNMP option)
Log onto the MCA Ethernet card. Open the SNMP settings page. Change SNMP settings and trap settings as required.
Access the Power Plant over the Company Network
Via Web Browser: Open your Web browser. Type in the unit’s IP address. Enter user name and password in the logon
window, and logon.
Expanded Procedure
Step 1: Record your PC's Network Settings
1.
Open the Control Panel on your computer.
2.
Select Network Connections.
3.
Select Local Area Connection.
4.
Select Properties.
5.
Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
6.
Select Properties.
7.
Record the current settings, these may be specific parameters or your computer may be set to automatically obtain these
parameters from your company's network.
Obtained IP Address Automatically
or
Use the following…
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Default Gateway:
8.
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
Select Cancel.
Step 2: Change your PC's Network Settings
1.
Open the Control Panel on your computer.
2.
Select Network Connections.
3.
Select Local Area Connection.
4.
Select Properties.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[165]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
5.
Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
6.
Select Properties.
7.
Select "Use the following IP Address".
8.
Enter the following.
9.
a.
192.168.1.2, as the IP Address.
b.
255.255.255.0, as the Subnet Mask.
c.
192.168.1.1, as the default Gateway.
Select OK. Note that you may have to reboot your computer for the settings to take effect. Follow any instructions you see on
the screen.
Step 3: Change the MCA Ethernet Card's Network Settings
1.
Connect the MCA Ethernet card's port to your company's network.
2.
Power up the MCA, if not already powered.
3.
Open your Web Browser. Type 192.168.1.1 in the Address box. Press Enter. The logon window opens.
You may have to change Internet Explorer options to do this. Go to Tools/Internet Options/LAN Settings, then temporarily
disable the proxy server. Another option is to select Bypass Proxy Server for local addresses and add 192.168.* under
Advanced.
If your PC cannot access the Logon window, it may be necessary to bypass your company network by using a "cross-over" cable
connected directly between your PC and the MCA Ethernet card. Repeat this step if necessary.
4.
Note:
5.
Type the default user name and password, then press Enter.
User Name: llp_admin
Password: llp_admin
The user name and password are case-sensitive. For security, the password is not displayed on the computer’s screen. You
have three attempts to enter a valid user name and password. If both are not entered correctly after three attempts, the
browser is redirected to a “Protected Object” message page. A link is provided on that page that will return you to the logon
window.
If a valid user name and password are entered, the System Status page opens.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[166]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
6.
On the toolbar near the top of the System Status web page, select ConfigureSystemNetwork Settings. The Network
Settings page opens.
7.
Enter the parameters issued by your IT department. When the required IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway have been
entered, click the Set IP Address button. VERIFY WHAT YOU HAVE TYPED, IF IT IS ENTERED INCORRECTLY YOU MAY NOT BE
ABLE TO COMMUNICATED WITH THE MCA ETHERNET CARD.
Note:
If a new value is unacceptable, an “Invalid Entry” message is displayed.
8.
On the toolbar, select ConfigureSystemReset VEC. The Reset VEC page opens.
9.
Click the Reset VEC button. Close your Web Browser.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[167]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Step 4: Reset your PC's Network Settings
1.
If you were using a crossover cable, reconnect your computer to your company's network and connect the MCA Ethernet card’s
port to your company's network.
2.
Open the Control Panel on your computer.
3.
Select Network Connections.
4.
Select Local Area Connection.
5.
Select Properties.
6.
Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
7.
Select Properties.
8.
Set the IP parameters to the original settings recorded at the beginning of this procedure.
9.
Check the new address settings by opening your Web Browser and entering the new IP address.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[168]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Step 5: Change the MCA Ethernet Card's SNMP Settings (if equipped with SNMP option)
1.
Open your Web Browser. Type the unit’s IP address in the Address box. Press Enter. The logon window opens.
2.
Type the default user name and password, then press Enter.
User Name: llp_admin
Password: llp_admin
Note:
The user name and password are case-sensitive. For security, the password is not displayed on the computer’s screen. You
have three attempts to enter a valid user name and password. If both are not entered correctly after three attempts, the
browser is redirected to a “Protected Object” message page. A link is provided on that page that will return you to the logon
window.
3.
If a valid user name and password are entered, the System Status page opens.
4.
On the toolbar near the top of the System Status web page, select ConfigureSNMPSNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings page
opens.
5.
Enter the SNMP Settings and click the Update Settings button. The screen refreshes and the new settings take effect.
6.
Add and/or delete traps as necessary. To add, type the Trap Address in Trap box and then press Add Trap Address. To delete,
select the Trap Address from the Trap List and then press Delete Trap Address.
Step 6: Access the Power Plant over the Company Network
Via Web Browser:
1.
With your Web browser open, type in the unit’s IP address.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[169]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
2.
Enter a valid user name and password in the logon window, and logon.
3.
You can now communicate with the power system over you company’s network.
CHECKING METER OPERATION
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
"MEASUREMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
a.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SYS LOAD ####A".
a.
4.
Requirement: Total system load current is displayed.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
a.
5.
Requirement: System output voltage is displayed ("SYSTEM ##.##VDC").
Requirement: Load current through the first system load shunt is displayed ("SYS LOAD** ####A").
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display individual load currents through the
remaining system load shunts (if furnished and connected to the MCA).
a.
Requirement: As the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton is pressed and released, load currents through the
remaining system load shunts are displayed. When all system shunts are cycled through, "MEASUREMENT MENU" is
displayed.
6.
If "MEASUREMENT MENU" is not displayed, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until it
is.
7.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
8.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until “PCU LOAD ####A” is displayed.
a.
9.
Requirement: Total Rectifier Module load current is displayed.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: Load current of the first Rectifier Module is displayed ("PCU** LOAD ####A").
10. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display individual load currents of the
remaining Rectifier Modules.
a.
Requirement: As the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton is pressed and released, load currents of the remaining
Rectifier Modules are displayed. When all Rectifier Modules are cycled through, "MEASUREMENT MENU" is displayed.
11. If "MEASUREMENT MENU" is not displayed, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until it
is.
12. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
13. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until “SUBSYS ##.##VDC” (if subsystem installed) is
displayed.
a.
Requirement: Subsystem output voltage is displayed.
14. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display “SUB LOAD ####A” (if subsystem installed).
a.
Requirement: Total subsystem load current is displayed.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[170]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
a.
Requirement: Load current through the first subsystem load shunt is displayed ("SUB LOAD** ####A") (if subsystem
installed).
16. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display individual load currents through the
remaining subsystem load shunts (if subsystem installed).
a.
Requirement: As the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton is pressed and released, currents through the remaining
subsystem load shunts are displayed. When all subsystem shunts are cycled through, "MEASUREMENT MENU" is displayed.
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION VALUES
Procedure
1.
Refer to MCA System Adjustments in the separate User Instructions (Section 5975), and perform the adjustment and calibration
procedures detailed to check the value of all customer adjustable system circuits and the calibration settings.
Note:
If the MCA Initialization procedure was performed, all adjustments were checked at that time.
Note:
You may skip the adjustment procedures for the alarms and low voltage disconnect circuits. They will be checked and adjusted
later in this procedure.
Note:
If TXM (multiple probe concentrator module) is installed, set the 'temperature compensation source' per "MCA System
Adjustments".
2.
When done, come back and finish this procedure.
CHECKING MCA AUDIBLE ALARM AND AUDIBLE ALARM CUTOFF (IF AVAILABLE)
Note:
Applies only if power system is equipped with either a List 10 or List 11 MCA.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the external AC disconnect or protective device that supplies power to a Rectifier Module.
a.
Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm sounds (if available).
b.
Requirement: Other alarms activate. Disregard them here. They will be confirmed in a later check.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm silences (if available).
b.
Requirement: MCA "ALARM CUTOFF" indicator goes yellow.
Wait the pre-programmed MCA audible alarm cutoff reset time interval.
a.
Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm again sounds (if available).
b.
Requirement: MCA "ALARM CUTOFF" indicator goes out.
Return the external AC disconnect or protective device to the ON position.
a.
Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm silences (if available).
CHECKING MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE AND MANUALLY INITIATED TIMED TEST/EQUALIZE
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[171]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" or "TEST/EQ MAN STOP"
is displayed. If "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" is displayed, perform steps 5) through 9). If "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed, go to step 10).
5.
Record the value indicated on the display.
6.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of
the display flashes.
7.
Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed increases above 99, then release the pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed.
8.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
9.
“ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
11. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
12. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SET TEST/EQ MODE".
13. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: System output voltage goes to the test/equalize setting.
b.
Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes yellow.
c.
Requirement: External test/equalize alarms activate (if available).
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
16. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SET FLOAT MODE".
18. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
19. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
Note:
a.
Requirement: System output voltage goes to the float setting.
b.
Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes out.
c.
Requirement: External test/equalize alarms reset (if available).
The following portion of this procedure takes one hour to complete. If you do not want to continue with this procedure, go to
step 32).
20. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
21. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
22. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed.
23. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
a.
Requirement: The display changes to "TEST/EQ HRS = ##", and the "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of the display flashes.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[172]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
24. Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to 1, then release the pushbutton.
25. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
26. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
27. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
28. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
29. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SET TEST/EQ MODE".
30. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
31. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: System output voltage goes to the test/equalize setting.
b.
Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes yellow.
c.
Requirement: External test/equalize alarms activate (if available).
d.
Requirement: In one hour, the following occurs...
o
Requirement: System output voltage goes to the float setting.
o
Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes out.
o
Requirement: External test/equalize alarms reset (if available).
32. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
33. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
34. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
35. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
36. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" is displayed.
37. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of
the display flashes.
38. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed increases to the value recorded in step 5), then release the
pushbutton. If "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" was being displayed in step 5), press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value
displayed increases above 99.
39. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
40. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
41. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING REMOTE TEST/EQUALIZE
Procedure
1.
Apply a remote test/equalize signal to the system.
a.
Requirement: System output voltage goes to the test/equalize setting.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[173]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
2.
b.
Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes yellow.
c.
Requirement: External test/equalize alarms activate (if available).
Remove the remote test/equalize signal from the system.
a.
Requirement: System output voltage goes to the float setting.
b.
Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes out.
c.
Requirement: External test/equalize alarms reset (if available).
CHECKING REMOTE HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
Caution:
Note:
This procedure may interrupt power to the load. Perform this test only during initial startup and checkout of the
system.
This procedures requires a load to be on the system.
Procedure
1.
Apply and remove a remote high voltage shutdown signal to the system.
a.
Requirement: The high voltage shutdown circuit on all Rectifier Modules activates to shut down the Rectifier Modules.
After approximately four seconds, the restart circuit is automatically activated to restore Rectifier Module operation.
b.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red while the Rectifier Modules are shut down, if battery is connected to the
system.
c.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active" while the Rectifier Modules are shut down, if battery is connected to the
system. Additional alarm messages (Rectifier Module fail) are displayed as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
d.
Requirement: External major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available) while the Rectifier Modules are
shut down.
CHECKING EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN AND FIRE ALARM DISCONNECT
Caution:
This procedure may interrupt power to the load. Perform this test only during initial startup and checkout of the
system, or when a load is not connected to the system.
Procedure
1.
2.
Apply an emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect signal to the system.
a.
Requirement: The Rectifier Modules inhibit.
b.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red, if battery is connected to the system.
c.
Requirement: MCA displays "2 Alarms Active", if battery is connected to the system. Additional alarm messages (Rectifier
Module fail and emergency stop) are displayed as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
d.
Requirement: External major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
Remove the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect signal from the system. Remove and re-insert the Rectifier
Modules.
a.
Requirement: The Rectifier Modules are restored.
b.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
c.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
d.
Requirement: External major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[174]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CHECKING REMOTE ON/OFF (TR) (IF RS-485 INTERFACE IS INSTALLED)
Procedure
1.
Apply an external Remote On/Off (TR) signal to the system, via the LMS1000 (if the RS-485 Interface is installed).
a.
2.
Requirement: Rectifier Module operation is inhibited for the Rectifier Module that the signal is directed towards. This can
be confirmed by placing a load on the system and observing zero output current from this Rectifier Module.
Remove the Remote On/Off (TR) signal from the system.
a.
Requirement: Rectifier Module returns to normal operation. Rectifier Module picks up share of the load.
CHECKING AC FAIL ALARM AND RECTIFIER MODULE FAIL ALARM
Procedure
1.
Note:
2.
3.
Open the external AC disconnect or protective device that supplies power to one (or more) of the Rectifier Modules.
a.
Requirement: Rectifier Module “Protection” indicator goes yellow.
b.
Requirement: MCA “AC” indicator goes red.
c.
Requirement: MCA “MINOR” indicator goes red (power removed from one Rectifier Module), or MCA "MAJOR" indicator
flashes red (power removed from more than one Rectifier Module).
If there is only one Rectifier Module installed, the "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
d.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages (AC fail) are displayed as you scroll through the
MCA alarm menu.
e.
Requirement: External AC fail, minor or major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
Open the external AC disconnect or protective device that supplies power to a second Rectifier Module (individual Rectifier
Module feeds only).
a.
Requirement: Rectifier Module “Protection” indicator goes yellow.
b.
Requirement: MCA “MINOR” indicator goes out.
c.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
d.
Requirement: MCA still displays "1 Alarm Active", but additional Rectifier Module fail alarm messages are displayed as you
scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
e.
Requirement: External major, AC fail major, and rectifier fail alarms activate (if available).
Return both external AC disconnects or protective devices to the ON position.
a.
Requirement: Rectifier Module “Protection” indicator on both Rectifier Modules go out.
b.
Requirement: MCA “AC” indicator goes green.
c.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
d.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
e.
Requirement: External AC fail, AC fail major, minor, major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
CHECKING FUSE ALARM/CIRCUIT BREAKER ALARM
Procedure
1.
Ensure that all circuit breakers (if installed) are in the ON position.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[175]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
2.
3.
Remove an alarm-type fuse from a fuseholder located inside a Distribution Cabinet, and replace with a known open fuse.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages (fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed
as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
Replace the open fuse with a known good fuse.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
4.
Perform steps 2) and 3) for each remaining alarm-type fuse located inside the Distribution Cabinet.
5.
Perform steps 2) through 4) for any additional Distribution Cabinet.
6.
Remove a distribution fuse (if installed) from the fuseblocks located inside a Distribution Cabinet, and replace with a known
open fuse.
7.
a.
Requirement: The indicator located on the fuseblock goes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
c.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages (fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed
as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
d.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
Replace the open fuse with a known good fuse.
a.
Requirement: The indicator located on the fuseblock goes out.
b.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
c.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
d.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
8.
Perform steps 6) and 7) for each remaining distribution fuse (if installed) located inside the Distribution Cabinet.
9.
Perform steps 6) through 8) for any additional Distribution Cabinet.
10. Remove an alarm-type fuse from a subsystem (if connected).
a.
Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages (fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed
as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
11. Replace the open fuse with a known good fuse.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
12. Perform steps 10) and 11) for each remaining alarm-type fuse located in the subsystem.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[176]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Note:
The following procedure is to be used only with circuit breakers that provide an alarm indication when manually placed to the
OFF (open) position. Electrical trip alarm circuit breakers cannot be easily tested in the field.
13. Place a distribution circuit breaker located inside a Distribution Cabinet (if installed) to the OFF position.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages (fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed
as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
14. Place the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
15. Perform steps 13) and 14) for each remaining distribution circuit breaker (if installed) located inside the Distribution Cabinet
Assembly.
16. Perform steps 13) through 15) for any additional Distribution Cabinet Assembly.
17. Place a distribution circuit breaker located on a subsystem (if installed) to the OFF position.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages (fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed
as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
18. Place the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c.
Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
19. Perform steps 17) and 18) for each remaining distribution circuit breaker located on the subsystem.
CHECKING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM 1
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
"SYS HV1 = ##.##V" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS HVS =" portion of the
display flashes.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[177]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to below system voltage level, then release
the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a high voltage alarm 1 alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External high voltage alarm 1, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. "SYS HV1 = ##.##V" is displayed.
13. With "SYS HV1 = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External high voltage alarm 1, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM 2
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SYS HV2 = ##.##V".
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS HV2 =" portion of the
display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to below system voltage level, then release
the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[178]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a high voltage alarm 2 alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External high voltage alarm 2, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SYS HV2 =
##.##V".
13. With "SYS HV2 = ##.##V" being display, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External high voltage alarm 2, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SYSTEM BATTERY ON DISCHARGE ALARM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS BOD = ##.##V" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS BOD =" portion of the
display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to above system voltage level, then release
the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[179]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a battery on discharge alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External battery on discharge, major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS
BOD = ##.##V" is displayed.
13. With "SYS BOD = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External battery on discharge, major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SYSTEM 50% BATTERY ON DISCHARGE (VERY LOW VOLTAGE) ALARM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS 50% = ##.##V (VERYLOVOLT =
##.##V)" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS 50% = (VERYLOVOLT =)"
portion of the display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to above system voltage level, then release
the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[180]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage) alarm message. To view, press and release the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage), major, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS
50% = ##.##V (VERYLOVOLT = ##.##V)" is displayed.
13. With "SYS 50% = ##.##V (VERYLOVOLT = ##.##V)" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage), major, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SYSTEM CURRENT ALARM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS CURR = ####A" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS CURR =" portion of the
display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to below system output current level, then
release the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes red.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[181]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a system current alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and
NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External, system current, minor, and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS
CURR = ####A" is displayed.
13. With "SYS CURR = ####A" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External system current, minor, and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SUBSYSTEM (IF CONNECTED) HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SUB HV = ##.##V" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SUB HV =" portion of the
display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to below system voltage level, then release
the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a subsystem high voltage alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[182]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
c.
Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until
"SUB HV = ##.##V" is displayed.
13. With "SUB HV = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SUBSYSTEM (IF CONNECTED) LOW VOLTAGE ALARM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SUB LV = ##.##V" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SUB LV =" portion of the
display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to above system voltage level, then release
the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a subsystem low voltage alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[183]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until
"SUB LV = ##.##V" is displayed.
13. With "SUB LV = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING SUBSYSTEM (IF CONNECTED) CURRENT ALARM
Procedure
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SUB CURR = ####A" is displayed.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SUB CURR =" portion of the
display flashes.
9.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is decreased to subsystem output current level, then
release the pushbutton.
10. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes red.
b.
Requirement: MCA displays a subsystem current alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and
NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c.
Requirement: External minor and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12. If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[184]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "SYS
CURR = ####A" is displayed.
13. With "SUB CURR = ####A" being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14. Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the
required value for your site, then release the pushbutton.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes out.
b.
Requirement: External minor and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
CHECKING LOW VOLTAGE DISCONNECT (IF FURNISHED)
The MCA is designed to prevent loss of power to customer loads caused by inadvertent misadjustment. Because of this feature, the LVD
circuits cannot be easily tested in the field, and such testing is not recommended. The following procedure is provided for users who do
require acceptance testing of the LVD circuits.
Caution:
This procedure requires disconnecting battery from the power system. In addition, system output voltage will
be reduced to 46 volts, and power to the loads may be interrupted completely during this procedure. Therefore,
perform this test only during initial startup and checkout of the system, or when critical loads are not
connected.
Disconnecting Batteries
Danger:
1.
In the next step, batteries are an energy source that can produce high amounts of electrical current. NEVER
allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one energized termination at a time, or to
simultaneously contact an energized termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can
cause an explosion resulting in injury. Remove watches, ring and other jewelry, and wear eye protection when
working with battery connections. Terminations of live battery cables must be sleeved when not connected.
Disconnect battery from the power system. To do so, open the external battery disconnect device(s) if available, or disconnect
battery cables as required.
Inhibiting LVD
1.
If the system is equipped with a low voltage disconnect "normal/inhibit" switch, place this switch to the "inhibit" position. This
prevents accidental disconnection of battery and system output from the controlled load(s) while performing this procedure.
a.
Requirement: The low voltage disconnect "inhibit" indicator illuminates.
Recording and Raising LVD Disconnect Setpoint(s)
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ADJUST LVD".
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[185]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
6.
Note:
"LVD1A = ##.##V" is displayed (if installed). If you are checking the other low voltage disconnect circuits, repeatedly press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until the respective low voltage disconnect circuit name is displayed
(LVD1B, LVD2A, LVD2B, LVD3A, or LVD3B).
For LVD 1, 2, and 3 circuits, the A and B sides must both agree for an actual LVD to take place.
7.
Record the value indicated on the display. This is the low voltage disconnect setting for this circuit.
8.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. Portion of the display flashes.
9.
Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when 46.00 volts
is displayed.
10. With the 46.00 volts being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
Note:
The low voltage disconnect value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE? + -” prompt.
12. Repeat steps 6 through 11 for each of the remaining LVD circuits (LVD1B, LVD2A, LVD2B, LVD3A, or LVD3B) in the system.
13. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
Configuring for Manual Test/Equalize
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
or
With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" or "TEST/EQ MAN STOP"
is displayed.
Note:
If "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed, the system is already set for manual test/equalize. In this case, proceed with step 9).
Note:
If "END TEQ ##.##HRS" is displayed, the system is set for manually initiated timed test/equalize, and a timed test/equalize is in
progress. In this case, you can proceed with steps 5) through 8) to cancel the timed test/equalize in progress and change the
current setting, or proceed with step 9) to proceed with the timed test/equalize in progress and make no changes.
5.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of
the display flashes.
6.
Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed increases above 99, then release the pushbutton.
"TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed.
7.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
8.
“ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
9.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[186]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
or
With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SET TEST/EQ MODE".
3.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
4.
"ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
Testing LVD Disconnect and Reconnect Functions
1.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
"ADJUST SYSTEM" is displayed.
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "TEST/EQ = ##.##V".
7.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ =" portion of the
display flashes.
8.
Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when 46.00 volts is
displayed.
9.
With 46.00 volts being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
10. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
Note:
The test/equalize voltage will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton
is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE? + -” prompt.
a.
Requirement: After a 5-10 second delay, the MCA LVD alarm activates. (Additional alarms may also activate.) To view the
alarm message(s), press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
b.
Requirement: External LVD alarm activates (if available).
11. If the alarm message was viewed in a) above, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"FUNCTION MENU".
12. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
13. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display “ADJUSTMENT MENU”.
14. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. “ADJUST SYSTEM” is displayed.
15. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "TEST/EQ = ##.##V".
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[187]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
17. Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ =" portion of the
display flashes.
18. Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when TEST/EQ
setpoint previously recorded is displayed.
19. With TEST/EQ setpoint previously recorded being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
20. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
a.
Requirement: After 10-15 seconds, alarm messages clear.
b.
Requirement: After 10-15 seconds, external LVD alarm resets (if available).
21. Perform the following steps if the low voltage disconnect circuit is set for manual reconnect. If set for automatic reconnect,
there is a 15-20 second delay before the LVD circuits reconnect.
a.
With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
b.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "ALARM LVD ACTIVE".
c.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
d.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until the low voltage disconnect circuit
being checked is displayed ("RECONNECT LVD**", **=the designation of the low voltage disconnect circuit).
e.
To reconnect the low voltage disconnect circuit being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
f.
"ARE YOU SURE? +-" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The low voltage disconnect
circuit reconnects.
22. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Readjusting LVD Disconnect Setpoint(s) to Factory Setting
1.
With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4.
Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUST LVD" is displayed.
5.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6.
"LVD1A = ##.##V" is displayed (if installed). If you are adjusting the other low voltage disconnect circuits, repeatedly press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until the respective low voltage disconnect circuit name is displayed
(LVD1B, LVD2A, LVD2B, LVD3A, or LVD3B).
7.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously. Portion of the display flashes.
8.
Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when the TEST/EQ
setpoint previously recorded is displayed.
9.
With the desired low voltage disconnect value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
10. “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[188]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
Note:
The low voltage disconnect value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE? + -” prompt.
11. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
12. Repeat this procedure to set the disconnect value for the other low voltage disconnect circuits installed.
Returning to Float Mode
1.
To return to float mode, with "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
2.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "SET FLOAT MODE".
3.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
4.
"ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton.
Caution:
5.
If the system is equipped with a low voltage disconnect "normal/inhibit" switch, place this switch to the "normal" position.
a.
6.
Requirement: The low voltage disconnect "inhibit" indicator (if furnished) extinguishes.
Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
a.
7.
DO NOT perform the next step until you verify that there are NO low voltage disconnect alarms active. If the
next step is performed when low voltage disconnect alarms are active, battery and system output will
disconnect from the controlled load(s).
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Repeat this procedure for the other low voltage disconnect circuits installed.
Reconnecting Batteries
Danger:
1.
In the next step, batteries are an energy source that can produce high amounts of electrical current. NEVER
allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one energized termination at a time, or to
simultaneously contact an energized termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can
cause an explosion resulting in injury. Remove watches, ring and other jewelry, and wear eye protection when
working with battery connections. Terminations of live battery cables must be sleeved when not connected.
Reconnect battery to the power system. To do so, close the external battery disconnect device(s) if available, or reconnect
battery cables as required.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[189]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
CHECKING SYSTEM STATUS
Procedure: Observe the status of the display and indicators located on the Rectifier Modules, MCA Interface Pad, and Distribution
Cabinet. If the system is operating normally, the status of these are as follows.
MCA Interface Pad:
a.
Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
b.
Requirement: MINOR indicator off.
c.
Requirement: MAJOR indicator off.
d.
Requirement: AC indicator green.
e.
Requirement: TEST/EQ indicator off.
f.
Requirement: ALARM CUTOFF indicator off.
Rectifier Module:
a.
Requirement: POWER indicator green.
b.
Requirement: PROTECTION indicator off.
c.
Requirement: FAULT indicator off.
Distribution Cabinet:
a.
Requirement: Low Voltage Disconnect INHIBIT indicator off.
FINAL STEP
Close the front door on each Distribution Cabinet. The door can be shut without turning the captive fasteners.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[190]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
NetPerform™ Optimization Services
At Emerson Network Power, we understand the importance of reliable equipment – it’s critical to both your business and your bottom
line. That is why we offer a wide array of services to meet all of your network infrastructure needs.
Customer Service (Pre-Shipment)
Email
CustomerService.ESNA@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280 option 1
Pricing and availability [1,2], purchase orders, expediting requests
and order tracking. Ask for your company’s dedicated Customer Service
Associate.
Customer Support Center (Post-Shipment)
Email
ESNACustomerSupportCenter@Emerson.com
Phone
1.956.661.6867
After an order has shipped, contact our Customer Support Center
with related questions, concerns or claims.
Account Management
Email
AccountManagement.ESNA@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280 option 2
Provides quotes and bid responses for custom configured [2] DC power
systems and outside plant enclosures for customers and channel partners
(Reps, VARs & Distributors).
Spare Parts
Email
DCpower.Spares@Emerson.com
OSP.Spares@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280 option 5
Pricing and purchase orders for spare parts, including but not limited to
breakers, cables, fuses, rectifier fans, misc. breaker and fuse panels,
enclosure fans, doors and switches, etc.
DC Power Depot Repair
Email
DCpower.Repair@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280 option 6
Creates and processes RMAs for depot repair and refurbishment.
Determines repair and refurbishment lead times and pricing based on
warranties/contractual agreements. Provides repair shipping information
and status.
Technical Support
Email
DCpower.TAC@Emerson.com
OSP.TAC@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.5260
Email
DCpowerReps.ESNA@Emerson.com
Phone
1.440.240.0639
Answers technical product and system questions; determines status of
warranties and contractual agreements for repair.
Provide quotes and bid responses for application specific configured DC
power systems for Liebert DC power sales reps.
--Contact Account Management for custom-configurations.
--Contact Spare Parts for parts and accessories.
[1]
[2]
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
[191]
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015
NetSure™ -48 VDC Power System
Installation Manual, Section 5974
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and may
not be suitable for all applications. While every precaution has been taken to ensure the
accuracy and completeness of this document, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems,
North America, Inc. assumes no responsibility and disclaims all liability for damages resulting from use of this information or for any errors or omissions. Refer to other local
practices or building codes as applicable for the correct methods, tools, and materials to
be used in performing procedures not specifically described in this document.
The products covered by this instruction manual are manufactured and/or sold by Emerson
Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. This document is the property of
Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and
proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North
America, Inc. Any copying, use or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson
Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies. Any questions regarding usage of trademark names should be
directed to the original manufacturer.
EmersonNetworkPower.com/Energy Systems (North America )
EmersonNetworkPower.eu/EnergySystems (EMEA)
© Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. 2015.
Business-C ritical Continui ty ™, Emerson Network Powe r™, the Emerson Netw ork Power logo , Emer son™ and Conside r it Solved are serv ice marks and
trademar ks of Emer son Electric Co. EnergyMaster ™, eSure™, NetPer form™, NetR each ™, NetSpan™, NetSure™ and NetXtend ™ are tradema rks of Eme rson
Network Power, Energy Syste ms, Nor th America, Inc . Any other product, brand, or company names or logos are the property of the respective owner.
Spec. No: 582126000
Model No: 701NVBB
While every precaution has been taken to ensure accuracy and
completeness herein, Emerson Electric Co. assumes no responsibility,
and disclaims all liability, for damages resulting from use of this
information or for any errors or omissions. Specifications subject to
change without notice.
Document Code: Section 5974
Revision S, July 21, 2015